Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
UL 1066 CIRCUIT BREAKER
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
3ZX1812-0WL00-1AN2923 99984 174
Operating Instructions Catalog No.: WLOPMAN1
NOTE
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise, which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office. The contents of this
instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains
the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements
contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
TRADEMARKS
Unless otherwise noted, all names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG or Siemens Industry, Inc. The remaining
trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Symbols
Visual examination
Hook
Slotted-type screwdriver
Cruciform screwdriver
Philips (PH), PoziDriv (PZ)
Torx screwdriver (T)
Hex socket screwdriver
Open end wrench
Tightening torque
Cable tie
Add in writing
First step of action sequence
10 Nm 89 lb-in
1
I
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Circuit breaker frame type label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Type label circuit breaker frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Frame designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Trip unit designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rating plug label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cradle type label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3 Standard specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
4 Packing and Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Lifting with a crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lifting with a Lifting Bar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lifting bar assembly (3-pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lifting bar assembly (4-pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lifting the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Lifting the fuse carriage (frame size III) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Mounting on horizontal surface -
Mounting tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Cubicle and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Main terminal bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Vertical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Connecting the main conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Application and configuration of fused circuit breakers 5-8
Secondary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Breaker Secondary Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Cradle Secondary Disconnect Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Secondary disconnect terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Wiring in cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Preparation of draw-out circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Inserting the circuit breaker into the cradle . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Positions of the circuit breaker in the cradle . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Unlocking the racking handle /
withdrawing the racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Racking circuit breaker into connected position . . . . . . 6-3
Inserting racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Charge the closing spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Check list for commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Closing the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Opening the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Reclosing a circuit breaker tripped by the trip unit . . . . . . 6-9
Re-commissioning after fused tripping (Not applicable for 4-
pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Replacing the fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Removing from service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
7 Frame sizes / dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Frame size II Drawout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Frame size II fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Frame size II, fixed-mounted version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Frame size II, door cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Frame size III, fixed-mounted version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Frame size III Drawout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Frame size III, fuse carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Frame size III, door cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
External sensor for neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Further dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
8 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Auxiliary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Signaling switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Trip / Electrical closing lockout . 8-4
Closing Coil / Electrical CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Remote Bell Alarm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Trip unit circuitry for ETU745-776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
With Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
and metering module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Metering module only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
9 Electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Trip units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Overview of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Trip unit ETU745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Trip unit ETU748 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Trip unit ETU776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
ETU displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Rating plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Ground-fault protection modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Replace the trip unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Internal trip unit self-test on
the overcurrent tripping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Sealing and locking device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
CubicleBUS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
External CublicleBUS modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78
External sensor for neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
External voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-92
Breaker Data Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Connection versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96
Handheld test device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-97
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-101
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Contents
II
10 Reset the reclosing lockout and the Bell Alarm . . . . 10-1
Resetting the Bell Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Resetting the Bell Alarm with reclosing lockout (optional) 10-2
Field Installation of a reclosing lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Removing the automatic reset mechanism . . . . . . . . 10-4
Installing the remote Bell Alarm reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Mounting remote reset solenoid and cut-off switch . . 10-5
Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
11 Shunt Trip / Closing Coil / Undervoltage release . . . 11-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Installing shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices
11-2
Installing optional signaling switches on shunt trips, closing
coils, and undervoltage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Setting delay times on undervoltage release . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Field Installation of a cut-off switch for shunt
trips and closing coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Mechanical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Final tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Electrical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
12 Auxiliary and control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Installing internal auxiliary switches S1 - S4 . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Installing the ready-to-close switch S20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Trip Signaling Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Trip Signaling Switches S13, S24, and S26 . . . . . . . . 12-5
Control switches - Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Communication switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Connecting secondary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
MOC Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
MOC Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Combination of MOC and
mechanical interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Mounting of MOC and mechanical
interlocking module on the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
13 Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Installing the motor operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Optional motor disconnect switch on the front panel . . . 13-3
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
14 Indicators and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
EMERGENCY OPEN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Operations counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
15 Locking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Key Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Breaker mounted key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Cradle mounted key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Installing racking handle key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Installing a Bell Alarm cover key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Padlocking provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Padlock locking the breaker OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Padlock Locking device for shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Padlock Locking device for guide rails . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
Padlock Locking device for racking handle . . . . . . . . 15-20
Padlock Locking device for spring charging lever . . . 15-20
CLOSE/OPEN padlock kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
16 Sealing covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
17 Mechanical interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Field installation of CLOSE / OPEN buttons blocking device
17-2
Cubicle door interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Installing the interlock mechanism to the cradle . . . . . 17-4
Cubicle door interlock drill pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Installing catch on the cubicle door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-5
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Interlock to prevent racking with cubicle door open . . . . 17-6
Coding between circuit breaker and cradle . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
18 Additional options for the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Field installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Truck Operated Contacts - TOC (Cradle Accessory) . . . 18-9
19 Mechanical circuit breaker interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Mechanical interlocking two sources (open transition) 19-3
Mechanical interlocking two
sources with a tie circuit breaker (open transition) . . . 19-4
Mechanical interlocking feeder circuit breakers
(single load, open transition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Mechanical interlocking three sources
(open transition to standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-6
Mechanical interlocking source and tie circuit breaker
(open transition to standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-7
Installing interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Installing intermediate shaft and coupling . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Fitting interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Mounting the Bowden cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-12
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
20 Arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Field installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
III
21 Door sealing frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
22 Plexiglas breaker cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
23 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Preparation for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Opening the circuit breaker and
discharging the closing spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Removing the circuit breaker from the cradle . . . . . . . 23-3
Changing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Removing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Reinstalling the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Checking arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Removing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Installing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8
Inspection of arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Checking contact erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Replacing the circuit breaker internal
contact assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11
Removing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Removing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Removing vertical adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-12
Removing pole assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Installing pole assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-17
Adjusting the contact wear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22
Attaching the vertical adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23
Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-26
Attaching the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-27
Installing the arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-27
Mechanical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-27
Exchanging the primary disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-28
Exchanging the finger cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-28
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-29
Exchanging the stab tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-30
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-31
Cleaning and greasing the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . .23-32
24 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
25 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
26 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
27 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
1 – 1
1 Overview
1.1 Circuit Breaker
(1) Arc chute (page 23-5)
(2) Carrying handle
(3) Identification tags
(4) Motor disconnect switch (option) (page 13-3)
(5) Circuit breaker type label (page 2-1)
(6) Spring charge indicator (page 6-7)
(7) Mechanical "CLOSE" button
(8) Rated current value
(9) Racking pictogram
(10) Make-break operations counter (option)
(11) Spring charging lever (page 6-4)
(12) Racking handle
(13) Racking shaft
(14) Options label (page 2-1)
(15) Grounding terminal
(16) Position indicator (page 6-2)
(17) Table for ground-fault protection (page 9-13)
(18) Key lock for racking handle
(19) Mechanical release of racking handle
(20) Trip unit (page 9-1)
(21) Rating plug
(22) "OPEN" button or
"EMERGENCY OPEN" mushroom pushbutton (option)
(23) Ready-to-close indicator (page 6-7)
(24) Circuit breaker OPEN / CLOSED indicator (page 6-7)
(25) Tripped indicator (reset button) (page 6-9)
(26) Locking device "lock OPEN" (option)
(27) Front panel
(28) Secondary Disconnects
1 – 2
1.1 Cradle
(with optional accessories)
(1) Arc chute cover (option)
(2) Hole for crane hook
(3) Arc vent openings
(4) Shutter (option)
(5) Locking device shutter (standard for shutters)
(6) Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking (option)
(7) Locking provision for guide rail
(8) Door interlock (option)
(9) Locking device in OPEN position (option)
(10) Cradle mounted locking device against closing the circuit breaker in disconnect position (option)
(11) Shutter operating device
(12) Rejection feature
(13) Option-related coding
(14) Secondary disconnects
0618-2
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(8)
(14)
2 – 1
2 Labels
2.1 Circuit breaker frame type label
(with terminal designations)
2.2 Type label circuit breaker frame
(1) Maximum rated current
(2) Max. rated operating voltages
(3) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
(4) Manufacturing date
(5) Instruction book & outline drawings
(6) Max. rated short-time withstand current
(7) Rated frequency
(8) Certifications
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA
Charging Motor
Remote Close Coil
X5-2 (+)
X5-1 (-)
X6-7 (+)
X6-8 (-)
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
1st Shunt Trip
UVR
2nd Shunt Trip
Remote Reset
X6-13 (-)
X6-14 (+)
X5-11 (-)
X5-12 (+)
X9-1 (-)
X9-2 (+)
X8-13 (-)
X8-14 (+)
Ready to Close Switch
X6-5
X6-6
240 VAC
4A
240 VAC
1st Shunt Trip Switch
X9-7
X9-8
240 VAC
240 VAC
UVR Switch
Open Fuse Switch
X9-10
X9-11
X9-5
X9-6
52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b
X6-3
X6-4
X6-11
X6-12
X6-1
X6-2
X6-9
X6-10
X5-5
X5-6
X5-9
X5-10
X5-3
X5-4
X5-7
X5-8
52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
240 VAC ,
Bell Alarm
240 VAC
5A
5A
X9-13
X9-14X9-12
3A
3A
Assembled in USA
10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A
0131-FW
254 / 508 V
31910220089ID-No.
kA Symm.
Inst.
Short Time
kA Symm.
Inst.
Short Time
Instr. Book &
Outline Dwg.: WLOPMAN1
Mfg. Date 2003-10-21
50/60 Hz
Frame Size:
Frequency
LISTED
kA
kA
kA
kA
100
85
85
85
Low Voltage AC
Power Breaker Frame
2000A
600V
12SZ
R
0132
(8)
(7)
(4)
(6)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(3)
2 – 2
2.3 Frame designation
(1) Type of circuit breaker
(2) Siemens interrupting class
(3) Frame size
(4) No. of poles
(5) Maximum rated continuous current.
2.4 Trip unit designation
(1) Type
(2) Catalog number
(3) Can be used in the following types of circuit breakers
(4) Regulatory approvals on a separate label
WLL2332
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
N450101000001
WLN., WLS., WLH., WLL., WLF., WLM.
0132-01
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
2 – 3
2.5 Rating plug label
(1) Catalog number
(2) Rated current of the circuit breaker
(3) Regulatory approvals on a separate label
2.6 Cradle type label
(1) Catalog number
(2) Rated current and rated insulation voltage of the cradle
(3) Seals of approval
(4) Circuit breakers that can be used with this cradle
(5) Siemens internal data
A second type label is attached to the baseplate inside the cradle or on one of its side walls.
(1)
(2)
(3)
0130
0130
Continous Rating:
Bz/Pos.
ass.order
Q.C.
For use with C.B. frames type:
R
LV AC Power Circuit
Breaker Adapter
/635VAC
WLGL2320
9344183 /20
250000445789 (1 of 5)
WLL2A320/WLL2S320/WLL2D320/
2000 A
WLL2Z320
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
3 – 1
3 Standard specifications
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this instruction manual and these product labels, a "qualified person" is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved and who, in addition, has the following
qualifications:
a) Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
b) Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
c) Is trained in rendering first aid.
The circuit breakers are suited for operation in enclosed spaces not subject to operating conditions aggravated by dust, corrosive vapors or
gases. Circuit breakers to be installed in dusty or damp locations must be appropriately enclosed.
The circuit breakers are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.13
- ANSI C37.16
- ANSI C37.50
- UL 1066
The electronic trip units are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.17
- UL 1066
The cradles are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.20.1
- ANSI C37.51
- UL 1066
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment, after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings, safety
notices, and maintenance procedures contained herein and on the devices.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation and
maintenance.
4 – 1
4 Packing and Lifting
4.1 Unpacking
Unpack the circuit breaker and inspect it for damage.
If the circuit breaker or cradle is to be installed at a later date:
they may only be stored and redispatched in the original packing.
4.2 Weights
NOTICE
Equipment Damage.
Placing the circuit breaker on its rear side may cause damage to the finger cluster assemblies.
When handling circuit breakers, do not place them on their rear side.
Frame Size
Weight
Draw-out circuit breaker Fixed Mounted
Circuit Breaker Cradle Circuit Breaker
+ Cradle
3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
II 800 A 159 lb / 72 kg 210 lb / 95 kg 185 lb / 84 kg 112 lb / 51 kg 161 lb / 73 kg Only lift separately
II 1600 A 159 lb / 72 kg 210 lb / 95 kg 185 lb / 84 kg 112 lb / 51 kg 161 lb / 73 kg Only lift separately
II 2000 A 177 lb / 80 kg 227 lb / 103 kg 203 lb / 92 kg 128 lb / 58kg 181 lb / 82 kg Only lift separately
II 3200 A 209 lb / 95 kg 258 lb / 117 kg 229 lb / 104 kg 152 lb / 69 kg 212 lb / 96 kg Only lift separately
II Fused 227 lb / 103 kg not available not available 150 lb / 68 kg not available Only lift separately
III 260 lb / 118 kg 434 lb / 197 kg 375 lb / 170 kg 306 lb / 139 kg 410 lb / 186 kg Only lift separately
III Fuse
Carriage 225 lb / 102 kg not available not available 306 lb / 139 kg not available Only lift separately
4 – 2
4.3 Lifting with a crane
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Improper lifting will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Never lift a circuit breaker or cradle above personnel.Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly.
Use OSHA/NIOSH approved crane equipment and personal protection equipment for lifting/moving the circuit breakers
and cradles.
Circuit Breaker Cradle
max. ½“ rope
NOTICE
Lifting a frame size III or frame size II 4-pole cradle with a breaker inside may result in distortion of the cradle.
Remove the frame size III breaker from the cradle before lifting.
> 3 ft
4 – 3
4.4 Lifting with a Lifting Bar Assembly
4.4.1 Lifting bar assembly (3-pole)
(1) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size II
(2) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size III
(3) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle FS II / III
(4) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle
(5) Hook for fuse carriage
4.4.2 Lifting bar assembly (4-pole)
(1) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size II
(2) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size III
(3) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle FS II / III
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Improper lifting will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Never lift a circuit breaker or cradle above personnel.Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly.
Use OSHA/NIOSH approved crane equipment and personal protection equipment for lifting/moving the circuit breakers
and cradles.
NOTE
Always lock the lifting bar assembly symmetrically on both sides.
0610_nu
(1) (2)
(3)(5) (4)
(1) (2)
(3)
4 – 4
4.4.3 Lifting the circuit breaker
4.4.4 Lifting the fuse carriage (frame size III)
0610-1_nu
1
2
2
0614_1
3
3
4
Lifting eye
0610-1_nu
1
2
2
4 – 5
Catalog No
Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (3-pole) WLLFT
Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (4-pole) WLLFT4
Portable hoist for use with the lifting beam WLHOIST
0613_1
5
3
3
4
4
0613_2
5 – 1
5 Installation
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Improper lifting will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Never lift a circuit breaker, fuse carriage, or cradle above personnel. Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly.
Use OSHA/NIOSH approved crane equipment and personal protection equipment for lifting/moving the circuit breakers
and cradles.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
5 – 2
5.1 Mounting
5.1.1 Mounting position
WARNING
Heavy Equipment
Can cause serious personal injury.
Use care when racking the breaker into the disconnect position. When a draw-out circuit breaker is mounted tilting toward
the front side, it is possible that the circuit breaker may slide out on the rails.
30°
30°
30°
30°
5 – 3
5.1.2 Mounting on horizontal surface -
Mounting tolerances
The circuit breaker must be mounted on a rigid, level surface, capable of supporting the weight of the breaker, cradle, and associated busbar
components. The maximum amount of offset in the mounting plane is 3/64“ (1mm).
(1) 4 bolts (5/16“ diameter) + belleville washers + nuts
NOTICE
Damage to finger clusters.
Improperly aligned bussing at the terminal connections may affect the position of the bus stabs. Misaligned bus stabs may
result in damage to the finger clusters during circuit breaker rack-in.
Do not distort the cradle terminal connections when connecting to the main bus.
0139
3/64” (1mm)
(1)
(1)
5 – 4
5.1.3 Cubicle and ventilation
(1) Upper ventilation opening
(2) Insulating liner use NEMA GPO-3, min. 0.094“ thick or comparable material
(3) Lower ventilation opening
1) Cubicle height given for use with insulating liner on cubicle top or cradles equipped with optional cover
2) Provided by cradle holes
Frame
size
Frame
rating
(A)
Interrupting
Class
Minimal cubicle dimensions Insulating liner
dimensions Cubicle ventilation
Width W1
(inch)
Height H
(inch)
Depth D1
(inch)
Width W2
(inch)
Depth D2
(inch)
Top
(square
inch)
Bottom
(square
inch)
II
800
N, S, H, L 22 22.51) 19.5 18.5 10.5 not required1600
2000
3200 N, S, H, L 22 22.51) 19.5 18.5 10.5 55 552)
II Fused
800
F22 22.51) 25 18.5 10.5 143 1372)
1600
2000
III
4000 H, L 32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5 48
(2 x 24) 882)
5000
3200
M32 30 19.5 28.5 10.5 48
(2 x 24) 882)
4000
5000
III Fused
3200
F32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5 88 882)
4000
5000
II 4-pole
1600
N, S, H 32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5 not required
2000
3200 55 552)
III 4-pole 5000 H, L 42 22.51) 19.5 39 10.5 48 (2 x 24) 882)
(1)
(2)
(3)
5 – 5
5.2 Main terminal connections
For main terminal dimensions of individual frame sizes, refer to: Frame sizes / dimension drawings (page 7-1)
The main terminals and connectors are intended for busbar connection with NEMA hole patterns.
The number and size of the busbars connected to the circuit breaker must be selected per ANSI C.37.20.1 in order to meet the test require-
ments according to ANSI C.37.51 depending on the rated current, defined by the rating plug. Different bussing in a given frame size may be
applicable.
5.2.1 Cradle connections
1) The terminal permits the use of 2“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.
2) The terminal permits the use of 4“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.
5.2.2 Horizontal connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers
1) The terminal permits the use of 2“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.
5.2.3 Vertical connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers
1) The terminal permits the use of 2“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.
2) The terminal permits the use of 4“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.
3) The FSII 3200 A and FSIII 4000 A, 5000A require vertical connectors.
Drawout Circuit breaker Connections to Line/Load side cradle connectors
Frame Size In max
Number of Available Busbar
Mounting Positions Busbar cross-section Number of holes
II
800 A / 1600 A 1 - 3
4“ x ¼“1) 42000 A 2 - 4
3200 A 3 - 5
III 4000 A / 5000 A 5 - 7 5“ x ¼“2) 6
Fixed mount Circuit Breaker Connection to Line/Load side horizontal terminals
Frame Size In max
Number of Available Busbar
Mounting Positions Busbar cross-section Number of holes
II 800 A / 1600 A / 2000 A 1 - 4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
Fixed mount Circuit Breaker Connection to Line/Load side terminals with vertical connectors
Frame Size In max
Number of Available Busbar
Mounting Positions Busbar cross-section Number of holes
II 800 A / 1600 A / 2000 A 1 - 4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
II 3200 A3) 1 - 4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
III 4000 A / 5000 A3) 5 - 7 5“ x ¼“2) 6
5 – 6
5.3 Connecting the main conductors
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Clean the main conductor connection
(plated busbars)
Securing line and load-side busbars
0058_u
Use grade 5 bolts 1/2“ and Belleville washers. Tighten to a torque of 70 Nm / 50 lb-ft.
5 – 7
Recommendation for supporting the main conductors
X
The connecting bars of all poles should be braced together, line and load side separately.
Frame size Rated breaking current
(kA)
Dimension x
(mm) (inch)
II
50 / 65 250 10
85 200 8
100 200 8
II fused 200 200 8
III
85 /100 200 8
130 / 150 100 4
III fused 200 200 8
These distances are recommendations and are not construction specifications. All designs should be type tested according to
ANSI C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51 for design validation.
5 – 8
5.3.1 Application and configuration of fused circuit breakers
5.3.1.1 Integrally fused and non-integrally fused circuit breakers
Frame size II (800 A through 2000 A) circuit breakers are equipped with fuses, which are fitted directly to the circuit breaker.
Due to size and heat constraints, the frame size III (3200 A through 5000 A frames) are not integrally fused. The fuses are mounted in a
separate fuse carriage which has the same outer dimensions as the circuit breaker and are connected in series with the associated circuit
breaker. The fuse carriage and frame size III fuse switch breaker system can be mounted in the same vertical section, or adjacent to one
another, but it is important that the interconnecting bus be kept as short as possible. The suitability of the design must be verified by type
testing.
Siemens fused circuit breakers are not sensitive to the infeed direction. The circuit breakers (or the combination of circuit breaker and fuse
carriage) can be fed from either the upper or the lower terminals.
5.3.1.2 Open fuse lockout
Every Siemens fused circuit breakers (or fused switch) is equipped with an open fuse lockout (OFLO). The purpose of the OFLO device is to
open the circuit breaker (or switch) and hold the device in the trip-free position until after the primary fuses have been replaced.
For frame size III fused devices, additional control wiring is required to interconnect the OFLO device within the fuse carriage and the OFLO
device within the circuit breaker (switch)..
NOTICE
Equipment damage.
Incorrect connection of the open-fuse lockout will prevent the circuit breaker from tripping when a fuse in the fuse carriage
responds. Polarity must be observed.
Connect the OFLO as shown below.
Fuse carriage
X9-4 X9-3
Fused circuit breaker
5 – 9
5.3.1.3 Key interlocking of fuse carriage and FS III fused circuit breaker
The racking mechanism for the fuse carriage is interlocked with the associated fused circuit breaker. In order to rack the fuse carriage, the
associated fused circuit breaker must be open, and the KIRK key must be removed from the circuit breaker, which unlocks the racking
mechanism of the fuse carriage.
(1) Fuse carriage FS III
(2) Circuit breaker FS III
(3) Interconnenction between cradles, according to the rated current of the circuit breaker.
(1)
line or load
line or load
(3)
(2)
5 – 10
5.4 Secondary wiring
Terminal assignment
(page 8-1)
Cross-sections
1) Use of wire end ferrules (crimp style) is possible
1 x up to14 AWG tube-type without insulating sleeve
1 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve
2 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve, twin wire end ferrule
2) 2 x up to 14 AWG tube-type without insulating sleeve
2 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve
Connection type Strip conductors 1 x 2 x
Screw clamp terminal
(SIGUT system)
20 -14 AWG1)
0.5 - 2.5 mm2 1) 20 -14 AWG 1)
0.5 - 1.5 mm2 1)
Spring clamp terminal 20 -14 AWG 1)
0.5 - 2.5 mm2 1) 20 -14 AWG 2)
0.5 - 2.5 mm2 2)
Ring terminal system
14 - 16 AWG
7 mm 1/4“
7 mm 1/4“
Recommendation:
AMP, PIDG series
Catalog No. 50881
Recommendation:
Siemens part
Catalog No. WL10RL
10 AWG
5 – 11
5.4.1 Breaker Secondary Disconnect
Arrangement
(1) Arc chute
(2) Secondary disconnect block
Field installation
(1) Dummy block
(2) Secondary disconnect block
(3) Secondary disconnect adapter block for high arc chutes.
X5
X6X8X9
(1)
(2)
COM15
COM16
0173-06
(1)
(2)
1
23
4
0173-09
(3)
5
60,7 Nm
PH 1
6 lb-in
TX 8
or
5 – 12
Connecting secondary wiring
Spring clamp terminal
5.4.2 Cradle Secondary Disconnect Block
Field installation
(1) Cradle with sliding contact modules
(2) Secondary disconnect blocks
Disassembly
(1) Secondary disconnect block
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
1
2
(1)
(2)
1
2
(1)
5 – 13
For the screw clamp terminal, a low profile, one-piece, sliding disconnect module is also available.
5.4.3 Secondary disconnect terminal blocks
Versions
(1) Screw clamp terminal system
(2) Ring terminal system
(3) Insulated ring terminal
(4) Screws ANSI B 18.6.3 #4
(5) Spring clamp terminal system
2 terminals per contact
0769
3,0 x 0,6
0,5 Nm
4 lb-in
3,0 x 0,6
(1)
PH 1
(2)
(3)
(4)
1/8“
0,5 Nm
4 lb-in
0,5 Nm
4 lb-in
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
(5)
5 – 14
Attaching the secondary disconnect blocks
(1) Secondary disconnect blocks
(2) Draw-out circuit breaker: Cradle secondary disconnect block
5.4.4 Wiring in cradle
(1) Arcing space*)
(2) Arcing openings
(3) Interlockings
*) If arc chute covers are available, the wires of the secondary disconnect blocks must not be laid on these covers.
NOTICE
Impermissable area for wires:
Damage to wires in this area.
(1)
1
2
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
0106-01_nu
5 – 15
5.4.5 Catalog numbers
Catalog No.
Circuit breakers secondary disconnect block WLCNMD
Secondary disconnect extension WLCNMDA
Screw clamp terminal (SIGUT) system WLGAUXPLUGP
Spring clamp terminal WLGAUXPLUGT
Ring terminal system WLGAUXPLUGR
Cradle secondary disconnect block WLGDSCN
Blanking cover WLGDAUXPLUG
Ring terminal crimp lug for AWG 10 wire WL10RL
Cradle secondary disconnect block with integrated low profile
screw clamp terminal block WLGAUXPLUGL
6 – 1
6 Commissioning
6.1 Preparation of draw-out circuit breaker
6.1.1 Inserting the circuit breaker into the cradle
Check circuit breaker position indicator/
Draw out guide rails
1) The circuit breaker can only be pushed in when the indicator displays "DISCON".
2) Pull out guide rails to the end-stop.
Place the circuit breaker into the guide rails and push it into the cradle up to the disconnected position. Close cubicle door.
NOTE
Remove padlocks from the shutter and place the locking device in the stowed position (page 15-19).
2
green
1
5
4
3
4
4
6 – 2
6.1.2 Positions of the circuit breaker in the cradle
(4) Secondary circuit
(5) Primary circuit
(6) Cubicle door
(7) Shutter
Diagram Positon indicator Primary
Circuit
Secondary
Circuit Cubicle Door Shutter
Withdrawn
position disconnected disconnected open closed
Disconnected
position disconnected disconnected closed closed
Test position disconnected connected closed closed
Connected
position connected connected closed open
(1) (2)
(4)
green
(3)
green
blue
red
6 – 3
6.1.3 Unlocking the racking handle / withdrawing the racking handle
1OPEN circuit breaker
2Push the crank inwards
3Pull out the handle
4Lift and hold the control lever
5Pull out the crank
6.1.4 Racking circuit breaker into connected position
6.1.5 Inserting racking handle
NOTICE
Racking Handle Damage.
Turning the racking handle beyond the stop will cause damage to the racking mechanism.
When the stop is reached, rotate the racking handle counter-clockwise until it can be pushed inwards.
5
4
Hold
3
2
1
Position indicator blue
green
red
Stop
1
2
34
6 – 4
6.2 Charge the closing spring
Charging manually
F Handle force
n Number of strokes
(1) Spring charged
WARNING
Heavy equipment
May result in serious injury and/or property damage.
Secure the circuit breaker before charging it manually (e.g. during service on the work bench).
NOTE
To charge the spring mechanism, grip the handle firmly and carry out each stroke evenly, moving the lever down as far as it will go.
Despite a significant increase in the required actuating force, the lever must be moved as far in the ninth stroke as in the first eight.
When the closing spring is fully charged, the lever can be moved without resistance.
9 x
12345678910 n
F
0727
(1)
6 – 5
Condition after 9 strokes:
(1) incomplete stroke, repeat stroke completely
(2) completely charged
Charging with a motor-operated mechanism
The motor-operated mechanism starts automatically when the control voltage is applied. The motor switches off
automatically when the charging process is completed.
The motor will re-engage immediately following spring discharge (closing operation).
Installing the motor operator (page 13-1)
0063-1
(1)
0063-2
(2)
6 – 6
6.3 Check list for commissioning
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Action required q
Verify the circuit breaker is OPEN
Verify the rating plug is installed
Rating plug (page 9-44)
Verify the TRIP indicator is reset
Set the trip unit to appropriate values
Trip units (page 9-1)
Apply secondary and control voltages
Close the cubicle door
Rack circuit breaker into connected position
Push in the racking handle
Charge closing spring
Ensure the following conditions exist
Undervoltage release energized
Locking devices not activated
Indicators
6 – 7
6.4 Closing the circuit breaker
6.5 Opening the circuit breaker
CLOSE button Remote activation
(The closing spring will be recharged by the motor-operated mechanism immediately after the circuit breaker has closed)
OPEN button Remote activation
NOTE
The minimum time interval between ON- and OFF-signal of the Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 3WL shall not be shorter than
100 ms.
Indicators
or
Indicators Without motor-operated mechanism
With motor-operated mechanism
after 10 seconds
or
Indicators Without motor-operated mechanism
With motor-operated mechanism
6 – 8
6.6 Tripping
* The breaker is untripped, and the Bell Alarm is shown reset
Tripped by Trip unit
Bell Alarm (tripped) indicator
Bell Alarm
Breaker indicators
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24*
Indicators Without motor-operated mechanism
With motor-operated mechanism
6 – 9
6.7 Reclosing a circuit breaker tripped by the trip unit
NOTE
The reason for tripping can be displayed using the "QUERY" button on the trip unit. This is stored for at least two days, provided that the
trip unit was activated for at least 10 minutes before tripping.
1
Find reason for
tripping
2
Indicator Overload in
main conductor
Overload in neutral
conductor
Short circuit:
short-time-delay trip
Short circuit:
instantaneous trip
Ground fault trip
3
Find and rem-
edy cause
- Check downstream load
- Check trip unit settings
- Inspect switchgear
- Check downstream load
4
Inspect circuit
breaker
Inspect contact system for possible damage
Maintenance (page 23-1)
5
Clear trip cause
6 – 10
6
Reset Bell
Alarm
Electric remote reset of Bell Alarm (page 10-5)
(optional)
With mechanical reclosing lockout
(optional)
Manual reset of reclosing lockout, Bell Alarm
and tripped indicator (page 10-2)
7
Indicators
Without motor-operated
mechanism
With motor-operated mechanism
Charge the closing spring (page 6-4)
Closing the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
6 – 11
6.8 Re-commissioning after fused tripping (Not applicable for 4-pole)
6.8.1 Measures
Frame size II Frame size III
1
Remove fused circuit breaker/
fuse carriage
2
Identify and remedy cause of
tripping
Check downstream loads
Check switchgear
3
Inspect main contacts of
fused circuit breaker
Checking contact
erosion (page 23-10)
4
Replace fuses
5
Insert fused circuit breaker/
fuse carriage
6 – 12
7
Reset reclosing lockout
8
Charge closing spring
9
Switch ON
Frame size II Frame size III
9X
6 – 13
6.8.2 Replacing the fuses
Frame size II
- Remove draw-out circuit breaker from cradle
-Replace all fuses.
Remove all fuses
3
2
1
PH 1
4
5
Size
5
6 – 14
Install fuse
(1) M12 socket head cap screw
(2) Belleville washer
(3) Ring terminal
(4) Threaded plate
(5) 2 x self-tapping collar screws M4
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
13
PH 1 Size
10
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
PH 1
3,2 Nm
9
(5)
28 lb-in
7
8
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Size
10
70 Nm
50 ft-lb
11
10
11
Size
5
8 Nm
71 lb-in
6 – 15
Frame size III
(1) Circuit breaker in cubicle
(2) Fuse carriage in cubicle
- Rack out and remove the fuse carriage.
13
14
PH 1
12
1
2
(1)
(2)
3
4
6 – 16
Replacing the fuse
(1) Socket head cap screw M14x50
(2) Washer
(3) Fuse
(4) Socket head cap screw M5x12 (6 ± 0,5 Nm)
(5) Countersunk screw M6x16 (8 ± 1 Nm)
1Loosen 2 screws, remove the cover
2Remove crank with retaining ring from racking shaft
3Pull out racking shaft on the other side
4Remove 6 screws securing the racking assembly
5Take out the complete racking assembly
6Replace the fuses
Re-assembly is carried out in the opposite order.
- Insert the fuse carriage and rack it into the connected position
0635-1
Size
10
60 Nm
45 ft-lb (1) (2) (3)
1
6
2
3
4
4
5
(5)
4
3
1
2
6 – 17
Frame Size Fuse Rating Fuse Kit (3 fuses)
FS II
400 A WLCLF0400
600 A WLCLF0600
800 A WLCLF0800
900 A WLCLF0900
1000 A WLCLF1000
1200 A WLCLF1200
1600 A WLCLF1600
2000 A WLCLF2000
2500 A WLCLF2500
3000 A WLCLF3000
FS III 6000 A WLCLF6000
6 – 18
6.9 Removing from service
Draw-out circuit breaker
1
OPEN the circuit breaker
2
Disconnect secondary
circuits
3
Depress the CLOSE button
4
Depress the OPEN button
5
Indicators
Position Indicator
green
Secondary Circuit
6 – 19
6.10 Troubleshooting
Draw-out
breaker Disturbance Possible Cause(s) Remedy
X
Circuit breaker cannot be
closed.
Circuit breaker not ready to
close.
Ready-to-close indicator
shows:
1. Spring not charged Charge spring
X2. Undervoltage release not
energized. Energize undervoltage release
X
3. Mechanical open fuse lock-out
effective
For fused circuit breakers:
Replace defective fuses and press
reset button
X4. Key lock engaged
(optional accessory) Unlock
X5. Padlocks installed Remove padlocks
X
6. "EMERGENCY OPEN"
button engaged in operating
position (accessories)
Release "EMERGENCY OPEN"
button by rotating it
X
7. Lockout effective against closing
when cubicle door is open
(accessories)
Close cubicle door
X8. Electronic trip unit missing or
incorrectly installed Install electronic trip unit properly
X
9. Racking handle withdrawn Rack circuit breaker into disconnected,
test or connect position, unlatch crank
and push crank fully in
X10. Mutual mechanical circuit breaker
interlocks effective (accessories)
Open second circuit breaker or rack
into disconnected position
6 – 20
Fixed-mounted
breaker
Draw-out
circuit breaker Disturbance Possible cause(s) Remedy
X X Circuit breaker cannot be
closed.
Circuit breaker ready to close.
Ready-to-close indicator:
1. Closing coil not energized or
incorrectly energized Check or apply correct voltage
X2. The secondary disconnects
have been removed Plug in the secondary disconnects
X
Circuit breaker cannot be
moved from the withdrawn
position into the disconnected
position
1. Racking mechanism of circuit
breaker not in disconnected
(DISCON) position (Check
circuit breaker position indica-
tor)
Rack the mechanism into
disconnected position
(green position indicator)
X
Circuit breaker cannot be fitted
in the guide rails 1. Factory mounted coding of
circuit breaker and cradle does
not match.
The circuit breaker is not rated for
use in this cradle. Replace with the
proper circuit breaker (permissible
circuit breakers are listed on the
cradle type label).
X
When racking from the discon-
nected into the test position,
the circuit breaker does not
move during the first 6
rotations (approximately)
2. Not a fault
(functional property) Continue racking
X
Racking handle cannot be
drawn out
1. Circuit breaker is closed Press "OPEN" button and pull
racking handle block out
X
2. Cubicle door not completely
closed (Locking device as
accessory)
Close cubicle door
XRacking handle cannot be
pushed in 1. Racking handle is interlocked
Rack circuit breaker into discon-
nected, test or connected position,
unlatch crank and push it fully in
XCubicle door cannot be
opened (door interlock as
accessory)
1. Closed circuit breaker is
preventing opening of
cubicle door
Open the circuit breaker
X2. Circuit breaker in connected
position
Rack circuit breaker into test or
disconnected position
7 – 1
7 Frame sizes / dimension drawings
7.1 Frame size II Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)
5.47 [139]
10.63 [270]
18.11 [460]
3.74 [95]
2.37 [60.1]
20.34 [516.7]
7.20 [183]
1.85 [47.1]
5.18 [131.6]
7.37 [187.3]
10.31 [262]
3.94 [100]
23.23 [590]
12.32 [313]
9.06 [230]
8.86 [225]
2.28 [58.0]
6.69 [170.0]
8.66 [220.0]
8.19 [208.0]
13.78 [350.0]
5.31 [135.0]
6.89 [175.0]
Wiring channel
Mounting holes
18.90 [480.0]
Ø
0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as
standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
Bottom ventilation area
(to remain unobstructed)
12.83 [326.0]
5.59 [142.0]
22.13 [562]
Ø0.35 [Ø9.0]
5.2461 [133.3]
8.35 [212.0] 7.89 [200.5]
Top ventilation area
(must remain unobstructed)
4.86 [123.5]
12.89 [327.5]
10.83 [275.0]
2.99 [76.0]
3.27 [83.0] 8.46 [215.0]
18.62 [473.0]
19.41 [493.0]
19.53 [496.0]
Middle escutcheon
19.65 [499.0]
Center escutcheon
2.31 [58.7]
3-pole cradle
2.24 [57.0]
4-pole cradle
6.97 [177.1]
Arc chute cover
(optional accessory)
Side ventilation area
(both sides - must remain
unobstructed)
Ground Strap
(optional accessory)
1.75 [44.5]
4.00 [101.6]
0.53 [ 13.5]
10.38 [263.6]
9.25 [235.0]
1.75 [44.5]
0.75 [19.1]
1.75 [44.5]
2.88 [73.1]
7 – 2
18.62
[473.0]
0.75
[19.0]
6.97
[177.1]
5.25
[133.3]
5.25
[133.3]
2.88
[73.1]
9.25
[235.0]
10.38
[263.6]
4.00
[101.6]
5.18
[131.6]
7.37
[187.3]
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
2.31
[58.7]
3.74
[95.0]
1.75
[44.5]
0.53 [
13.5]
3200 A
2000 A
800/1600 A
5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3]
0.25 [6.4]
0.25 [6.4]
0.25 [6.4]
5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3]
5.75 [146.1]
0.25 [6.3]
0.25 [6.3]
5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3]
0.25 [6.3]
0.25 [6.3]
5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3] 5.75 [146.0]
7 – 3
18.62
[473.0]
0.75
[19.0]
6.97
[177.1]
2.88
[73.1]
9.25
[235.0]
10.38
[263.6]
4.00
[101.6]
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
2.31
[58.7]
1.75
[44.5]
Ø0.53
[Ø13.5]
5.25
[133.3]
5.25
[133.3]
0.50
[12.7]
5.25
[133.3]
VER TICAL MAIN
BU SC ONNECT OR S
5.25
[133.3]
1.75
[44.5]
0.75
[19.0]
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
HORIZONT AL MAIN
BUS CONNECT OR S
NOTE:
ROT AT ABLE MAIN BUS CONNECT ORS ARE ONL Y AV AILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
(3) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR SHORT-CIRCUIT RATINGS OF 85kAIC OR LESS
(2) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR FS2 800A-2000A
(1) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR 3-POLE VERSIONS
5.25
[133.3]
5.25
[133.3]
HORIZONT AL MAIN
BUS CONNECT ORS
0.50
[12.7]
0.50
[12.7]
3.75
[95.3]
6.97
[177.1]
3.75
[95.2]
7.5
[190.5]
BUS CONNECT OR S
VER TICAL MAIN
7 – 4
Lif ting Poin t( Cradle an d
Breaker) Do not lif tb y other
point s.
Closed door racking
Lif ting Point (Cradle
only) Do not lif tb y othe r
point s.
34.80
[884]
Withdrawn positio n
15.7
[398]
19.1 3
[486.0]
Minimum fre es pa ce fo r
circuit breaker racking
6.43
[163.4 ]
0.75
[19.0]
7 – 5
7.2 Frame size II fused
7 – 6
C
L
C
L
7.37
[187.3]
5.18
[131.6]
5.25
[133.4]
5.25
[133.4]
7.89
[200.5]
13.35
[339.2]
5.25
[133.4]
5.25
[133.4] 0.25
[6.3]
0.25
[6.4]
Top ventilation area (must
remain unobstructed)
23.63
[600.1]
2.31
[58.7]
1.75
[44.5]
6.97
[177.1]
1.75
[44.5]
0.75
[19.1]
1.75
[44.5]
4.00
[101.6]
Ø0.53
Ø[13.5]
1.75
[44.5]
10.38
[263.6]
9.25
[235.0]
2.88
[73.2]
7 – 7
7 – 8
7.3 Frame size II, fixed-mounted version
(1) = Slots 0.2 [5] for insulation barriers
5.12 [130.0]
5.12 [130.0]
(1)
0.16 [4.0]
20.83 [529.0]
8.58 [218.0]
0.16 [4.0]
9.06 [230.0]
M8
0.35 [ 9.0]
4.33 [110.0]
5.91 [150.0]
0.79 [20.0]
22.44 [570.0]
Rear View
Fixed mount versions are only
available with rear vertical connector
for FS2 3200A and FS3 4000A/5000A 1.57 [40.0]
0.79 [20.0]
2.56 [65.0]
5.12 [130.0]
5.12 [130.0]
5.12 [130.0]
5.91
[150.0]
M8
required space for aux. connectors
including wire-channel
press-in-nut
M8 (metric thread)
0.53
[13.5]
3.75
[95.3]
7.50
[190.5]
0.67 [17.0]
0.75 [19.0]
10.17 [258.4]
5.91 [150.0]
1.77 [45.0]
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
5.00 [127.0]
0.79
[20.0]
1.75
[44.4]
17.78
[451.5]
18.70
[475.0]
22.44 [570.0]
23.23 [590.0]
breaker front cover
0.39 [10] up to 1600A
0.59 [15] up to 2000A
4.92
[125.0]
5.91
[150.0]
0.39 [10] up to 1600A
0.59 [15] up to 2000A
7 – 9
7.4 Frame size II, door cut-outs
Additional information on: Cut-outs for "through-door racking" with Door sealing frame (page 21-1) is given in Chapter 21.
Cut-outs for attaching the Plexiglas cover are shown in Chapter 22.
(middle escutcheon visible)
Door cut-out
10.39
[263.9]
Door cut-out (with edge protector)
11.41
[289.9]
5.71
[144.9]
Ø1.42
[Ø36.0]
4.45
[113.0]
1.40
[35.5]
(Max. radii, 4 plc's)
R0.39
[R10.0]
13.38
[339.9]
0.83
[21.1]
2.74
[69.5]
5.19
[131.9]
(Max. radii, 4 plcs)
R0.08
[R2.0]
(only center escutcheon visible)
Minimal door cut-out
5.63
[142.9]
1.93
[49.0]
10.98
[278.9]
4.78
[121.5]
R0.08
[R2.0](Max. radii, 4 plcs)
10.98
[278.9]
4.78
[121.5]
(door sealing frame)
Door cut-out and mounting holes for edge protector
breaker front panel breaker front panel
breaker front panel breaker front panel
7 – 10
7.5 Frame size III, fixed-mounted version
press-in nut M 10
(metric thread)
35.04 [890.0]
17.77 [451.5]
20.67 [525.0]
35.98 [914.0]
required space for aux. connectors
including wire-channel
breaker front cover
5.91 [150.0]
0.79 [20.0]
1.77 [45.0]
11.28 [286.5]
1.75 [44.4]
1.75 [44.4]
1.75 [44.4]
7.50 [190.5]
3.75 [95.2]
0.55 [ 14.0]
1.75 [44.4]
1.20 [30.5]
5.00 [127.1]
required space for aux. connectors
including wire-channel
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
Fixed-mounted versions are only available as
4-pole with vertical connections.
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0]
0.25 [6.4]
0.26 [6.7]
(gap)
(copper bar)
breaker front cover
9.04 [229.5] 5.91 [150.0]
4.33 [110.0]
0.79 [20.0]
0.43 [ 11.0]
M10
35.08 [891]
33.47 [850.0]
8.27 [210.0]
0.16 [4.0] (1)
8.27 [210.0]
breaker front cover
Top view vertical connection Rear view
7 – 11
7.6 Frame size III Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)
12.01 [305.0]
8.54 [217.0]
16.81 [427.0]
8.74 [222.0]
17.01 [432.0]
20.28 [515.0]
27.72 [704.0]
35.98 [914.0]
10.26 [260.5]
20.34 [516.7]
5.18 [131.6]
7.37 [187.2]
1.85 [47.0]
5.47 [139.0]
10.24 [260.0]
10.63 [270.0]
Ø 0.35 [Ø 9.0]
Mounting holes
8.19 [208.0]
8.66 [220.0]
6.69 [170.0]
2.28 [58.0]
9.84 [250.0]11.61 [295.0]
23.23 [590.0]
31.50 [800.0]
8.35 [212.0]
7.89 [200.5]
Arc chute cover
(optional accessory)
Side ventilation area
(both sides - must remain
unobstructed)
6.75 [171.5]
3.39 [86.0] 8.46 [215.0]
18.62 [473.0]
19.41 [493.0]
19.53 [496.0]
Middle escutcheon
19.65 [499.0]
Center escutcheon
2.31 [58.7]
3-pole cradle
2.24 [57.0]
4-pole cradle
Bottom ventilation area
(to remain unobstructed
for 5000A circuit breaker)
Ø 0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as
standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
Door panel
Top ventilation area
(must remain unobstructed)
Wiring channel
Optional ground strap
7 – 12
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 3.75 [95.2]
7 – 13
7 – 14
7.7 Frame size III, fuse carriage
7 – 15
7 – 16
7.8 Frame size III, door cut-outs
Door cut-out (with edge protector)
Door cut-out
(middle escutecheon visible)
Minimal door cut-out
(only center escutecheon visible)
RO.39
[RIO.O] (Max. radii, 4 plc´s)
[ø36.0]
ø1.42
[145.1]
5.71
[35.5]
1.40
[113.1]
4.45
[290.1]
11.42
[21.1]
0.83
[69.5]
2.74
[340.2]
13.39
[R2.0]
[R0.08] (Max. radii, 4 plc´s)
[279.1]
10.99
[121.6]
4.79
[49.0]
1.93
[264.1]
10.40
[132.1]
5.20
[121.6]
4.79
[279.1]
10.99
[143.1]
5.63
7 – 18
7.9 External sensor for neutral conductor
WLNCT2
7 – 19
WLNCT3
7 – 20
Iron Core: WLG800NMCT23, WLG1200NMCT23, WLG1600NMCT23, WLG2000NMCT23, WLG2500NMCT23,
WLG3000NMCT23, WLG3200NMCT23, WLG4000NMCT23, WLG5000NMCT23, WLG6000NMCT23, WLGNMDGCT23
7.10 Further dimension drawings
-Door sealing frame (page 21-1)
- Shrouding cover (page 22-2)
Additional information on: Cut-outs for "through-door racking" with Door sealing frame (page 21-1) are shown in Chapter 21.
Cut-outs for attaching the plexiglass cover are shown in Chapter 22
8 – 1
8 Circuit diagrams
8.1 Terminal assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Remote reset Bell Alarm & tripped indicator F7
CUB +
CUB -
24 V DC
0 V DC
External Iron Core Ground Fault Sensor S2
External Air Core Neutral Sensor S1
External Air Core Neutral Sensor S2
External voltage transformer L1
External voltage transformer L2
voltageExternal transformer L3
External voltage transformer Com
COM15/16, otherwise empty
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
S 2
S 2
“Ready to close” signal S20
Closing Coil CC
S1
S1
1st Shunt Trip.
X8
X7
X6
X5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
S 4
S 4
S 3
S 3
2nd :auxiliary release F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td"
F4 only “quick OPEN”
0053-07_nu
Internal External
Terminals ANSI
C37.2
device
#
LT / (+) Control power
N / (-)
EMERGENCY OPEN
or short terminals
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
24 V DC Input
Terminating resistor if no
external CubicleBUS module is connected
, 120 , 0.5 WΩ
Short terminals, if no Neutral sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 30
52CS
52CC
52CS
52TC
79
52TC / 86
52a
52b
52b
52b
52a
52a
52LC
52CC
52a
52b
52M
62
27
Signalling switch for 2nd shunt trip
Signaling switch for remote tripping
Bell Alarm S24
Open Fuse Indication S26
2nd shunt trip F2
X9
LT / (+) Control power
N / (-)
LT / (+) Control power
N / (-)
LT / (+) Control power
N / (-)
LT / (+)
LT / (+)
Control power
Control power
Fuse carriage FS III
N / (-)
X9.3
X9.4
LT / (+) Control power
N / (-)
OFLO
BA
TC
TC
CC
b
a
a
a
b
a
b
b
External Iron Core Ground Fault Sensor S1
Open Fuse Lockout Device (FS III Only)
Optional motor disconnect switch
8 – 2
8.2 Auxiliary switches
Wire no.
13
24
S1
X6.12
X6-12
X6.10
X6-10
X6.11 X6-11
X6.9 X6-9
13
X6.4
X6-4
X6.2
X6-2
X6.3X6-3
X6.1 X6-1
X5.10
X5-10
X5.8X5-8
X5.9 X5-9
X5.7 X5-7
X5.6X5-6
X5.4
X5-4
X5.5X5-5
X5.3X5-3
S1, S2
Optional auxiliary switches
Internal
S3, S4
Optional additional auxiliary switches
0136-01_u
Wire no.
Te r mi n als
Terminals
ba
13
24
S3
ba
13
24
S4
ba
24
S2
ba
S1 S2 S3 S4
8 – 3
8.3 Signaling switches
*) Same installation location as S43
1) Contact closed means that the undervoltage release is energized or shunt trip is not energized - circuit breaker is possibly "ready to close".
Contact open means that the undervoltage release is not energized or shunt trip is energized - circuit breaker is not "ready to close".
Reset
S20 S26
X6.6
X9.6
X6-6
X9-6
X6.5
X9.5
X6-5
X9-5
color color
sw / blk bl / blue
bl / blue
bl / blue
“Trip”
“Reset”
bn or gr
sw / blk
sw / blk
1
4
COM NO
NO
NO
NC
COM
COM
S23
X9.10
X9.11
1
4
S24
X9.14
X9.12
X9.13
F1
S22
X9.8
X9.7
1
4
0136-02_u
Wire no.
Internal
Wire no.
erTminals
Terminals
TC TC/UVR
Open Fuse
Indication
NO
bn or gr
sw / blk
COM
S22 S20 S23 *)S24
8 – 4
8.4 Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Trip / Electrical closing lockout
L
*) EMERGENCY OPEN or short terminals
**) Same installation location
1) For circuit breaker equipped with shunt trip and closing coil, the combined cutoff- switch S14 / S15 will be used. (One switch NO + NC is serving both solenoids.)
TC TC UVR
UVRD
a
a
F1 F2, F3, F4 **)
1)
8 – 5
8.5 Closing Coil / Electrical CLOSE
*) Same installation location as S12
1) For circuit breaker equipped with shunt trip and closing coil, the combined cutoff- switch S14 / S15 will be used. (One switch NO + NC is serving both solenoids.)
2) Use twin wire end ferrule
Crimping tool e.g.: Weidmüller PZ3 to PZ6, WAGO Variocrimp 4
CC S10 *)
CC
CC
b
1)
2)
8 – 6
8.6 Motor-operated mechanism
*) Same installation location as S10
8.7 Remote Bell Alarm Reset
_u
S12 *) M
24 - 30 V DC
48 - 60 V DC
L+
L- X5.1
X5.2
BA
_u
F7 S13
8 – 7
8.8 Trip unit circuitry for ETU745-776
8.8.1 With Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
and metering module
1) Terminating resistor 120 0.5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c module
2) If no metering module and no BSS module is used:
Direct connection X8 to ETU
- BSS module: Breaker Status Sensor
-c: Bus system for interconnection of circuit breaker components and connection to the fieldbus:
PROFIBUS-DP with COM15
MODBUS with COM16
- ETU: Trip Unit
- S40 signaling switch "ready-to-close"
- S41 signaling switch for spring charge level
- S43 signaling switch 2nd shunt trip F3 or F4
- S44 signaling switch for main contacts OPEN / CLOSE position
- S45 Bell Alarm signaling switch
_u
External Air Core
Sensor Input
External Iron Core
Sensor Input
*)
S43 *)
S45
S40
S44
S41
ETU
F5
*) same installation location as S23
8 – 8
8.8.2 Metering module only
1) Terminating resistor 120 0.5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c module
_u
External Air Core
Sensor Input
External Iron Core
Sensor Input
8 – 9
8.8.3 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) only
L
1) Terminating resistor 120 0,5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c module
_u
External Air Core
Sensor Input
External Iron Core
Sensor Input
9 – 1
9 Electronic components
9.1 Trip units
9.1.1 Overview of function
qstandard
ooptional
-not available
1fixed
Trip Units
Functions ETU745
(9-2)
ETU748
(9-6)
ETU776
(9-8)
Basic protective functions (page 9-12)
Overload protection (L-tripping) qqq
Short-time-delayed short-circuit protection (S-tripping) qqq
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I-tripping) q q
1) q
Neutral conductor protection (N-tripping) q q q
ground-fault tripping o o o
Additional functions (page 9-14)
Load monitoring q q q
Leading signal for "L-tripping" q q q
Thermal memory can be switched on/off q q q
Zone selective interlocking o o o
Neutral conductor protection can be switched on/off q q q
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off q q q
Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off q -q
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2tq q q
Overload protection switchable to I4tq q q
Changeable parameter sets - - q
Ground-fault protection to I2t o o o
Ground-fault alarm o o o
Display (page 9-18)
Alphanumeric display o o -
Graphical display (fixed-mounted) - - q
Communication
Communication via c q q q
Communication via PROFIBUS-DP o o o
Communication via MODBUS o o o
Communication via Ethernet o o o
Metering function (page 9-72)
Metering function PLUS o o o
Parameterization
Parameterization via rotary coding switches q q -
Parameterization via communication (absolute values) - - q
Parameterization via menu (absolute values) - - q
Remote parameterization of basic protective functions - - q
Remote parameterization of additional functions q q q
Other
Option for connecting to an external 24 V DC power supply q q q
9 – 2
9.1.2 Trip unit ETU745
Overview
1) The trip cause is stored internally for at least two days if the trip unit has been activated for at least 10 min before tripping
(for unlimited time with auxiliary power).
2) Changeover switch only accessible with removed module.
NOTICE
Electrostatic Discharge
Trip unit may become inoperative.
Before the protective cover is removed, ensure that the equipment to be connected, and also the operating
personnel, are at the same potential.
Option: Ground-fault module
Mechanical RESET
for Bell Alarm
Rating plug
Scroll up
Indications
COMMUNICATIONS
EXTENDED
Rotary coding switch
instantaneous pickup setting
Rotary coding switch ground-fault
pickup setting
Rotary coding switch ground-fault
alarm setting
Query button
Te s t bu t t o n
Option: Reset Lockout
prevents accidental resetting of the lock-out
mechanism after a trip
Option: Alphanumeric display
Thermal memory On/Off
Neutral conductor protection On/Off
Neutral conductor overload setting
Overload trip curve mode I2t / I4t
Rotary coding switch long-time delay setting
Rotary coding switch short-time delay setting
Trip cause indicator 1)
Indications
Ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault tripped
Rotary coding switch ground-fault time
delay setting tg / I2tg
Clear button
Test connector
Trip unit error indicator
Changeover switch ground-fault detection mode 2)
Rotary coding switch long-time
delay pickup setting
Rotary coding switch short-time
delay pickup setting
Scroll down
Trip unit
Overcurrent alarm
activated
Sealing eyelet
and remote trip
9 – 3
Overcurrent protection settings
The parameters for the basic functions are adjusted with rotary coding switches.
Various additional functions are adjusted with slide switches.
The settings for the additional function "load monitoring" can be adjusted via:
-the alphanumeric display (page 9-18)
-the BDA (page 9-93)
- the PROFIBUS-DP
- the MODBUS
These settings can only be adjusted if the trip unit is activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply
(UL Listed Class 2).
Protective functions
Overload protection – L-tripping (page 9-12)
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping (page 9-12)
Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping (page 9-13)
Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping (page 9-13)
Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping (page 9-14)
Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding) (page 9-14)
Leading signal for L-tripping (page 9-14)
Thermal memory can be switched On/Off (page 9-15)
Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-45)
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
The value 0.1 is set if the
rotary switch is positioned in this
zone
3 x 0.5
1/8“
9 – 4
Characteristics
The ranges shown in the following are only setting ranges of the respective parameters. Possible tolerance ranges are not included here.
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software.
The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class, 480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
S-tripping
9 – 5
I-tripping
Ground-fault tripping
9 – 6
9.1.3 Trip unit ETU748
Overview
1) The trip cause is stored internally for at least two days if the trip unit has been activated for at least 10 min before tripping
(for unlimited time with auxiliary power).
2) The switch is only accessible when the breaker front cover is removed.
NOTICE
Electrostatic Discharge
Trip unit may become inoperative.
Before the protective cover is removed, ensure that the equipment to be connected, and also the operating
personnel, are at the same potential.
Option: Ground-fault module
Mechanical RESET
for Bell Alarm
Rating plug
Scroll up
Indicators
COMMUNICATIONS
EXTENDED
Rotary coding switch ground-fault
pickup setting
Rotary coding switch ground-fault
alarm setting
Query button
Te s t bu t t o n
Rotary coding switch long-time delay setting
Option: Reset Lockout
Option: Alphanumeric display
Scroll down
Thermal memory On/Off
Neutral conductor protection On/Off
Neutral conductor overload setting
Overload trip curve mode I2t / I4t
Rotary coding switch short-time delay setting
Trip cause indicator 1)
Indications
Ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault tripped
Rotary coding switch ground-fault time
delay setting tg / I2tg
CLEAR button
Test connector
Trip unit error indicator
Changeover switch ground-fault detection mode 2)
prevents accidental resetting of the lockout
mechanism after a trip
Rotary coding switch long-time
delay pickup setting
Rotary coding switch short-time
delay pickup setting
Trip unit
Overcurrent alarm
activated
Sealing eyelet
and remote trip
9 – 7
Overcurrent protection settings
The parameters for the basic functions are adjusted with rotary coding switches.
Various additional functions are adjusted with slide switches.
The settings for the additional function "load monitoring" can be adjusted via:
-the alphanumeric display (page 9-18)
-the BDA (page 9-93)
- the PROFIBUS-DP
- the MODBUS
These settings can only be adjusted if the trip unit is activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply
(UL Listed Class 2).
Protective functions
Overload protection – L-tripping (page 9-12)
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping (page 9-12)
Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping (page 9-13)
Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping (page 9-13)
Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping (page 9-14)
Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding) (page 9-14)
Leading signal for L-tripping (page 9-14)
Thermal memory can be switched On/Off (page 9-15)
Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-45)
Characteristics
The ranges shown in the following are only setting ranges of the respective parameters. Possible tolerance ranges are not included here.
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software. The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class,
480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
(page 9-4)
S-tripping
(page 9-4)
Ground-fault tripping
(page 9-5)
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
The value 0.1 is set if the
rotary switch is positioned in this
zone
3 x 0.5
1/8“
9 – 8
9.1.4 Trip unit ETU776
Overview
1) The trip cause is stored internally for at least two days if the trip unit has been activated for at least 10 min before tripping
(for unlimited time with auxiliary power).
NOTICE
Electrostatic Discharge
Trip unit may become inoperative.
Before the protective cover is removed, ensure that the equipment to be connected, and also the operating
personnel, are at the same potential.
Mechanical RESET
for Bell Alarm and
Rating plug
Indicators
Trip cause indicator 1)
Query button
Te s t bu t t o n
Areas to record
protective settings
Option: Ground-fault module
COMMUNICATIONS
Trip unit activated
Overcurrent alarm
Areas to record
protective settings
Option: Reset Lockout
Graphical display
Trip unit error indicator
Indicators
Ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault tripped
CLEAR button
Test connector
prevents accidental resetting of the lockout
mechanism after a trip
Sealing eyelet
remote trip
Operating keys for setting
tripping parameters
9 – 9
Overcurrent protection settings
All parameters for the basic and the additional functions can be adjusted via:
- the graphical display (page 9-29)
-the BDA (page 9-93)
- the PROFIBUS-DP
- the MODBUS
To do this, the trip unit must be activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply (UL Listed Class 2).
Protective functions
Overload protection – L-tripping (page 9-12)
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping (page 9-12)
Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping (page 9-13)
Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping (page 9-13)
Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping (page 9-14)
Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding) (page 9-14)
Leading signal for L-tripping (page 9-14)
Thermal memory can be switched On/Off (page 9-15)
Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-45)
Characteristics
The ranges shown in the following are only setting ranges of the respective parameters. Possible tolerance ranges are not included here.
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software.
The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class, 480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
(page 9-4)
I-tripping
(page 9-5)
Ground-fault tripping
(page 9-5)
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
9 – 10
9.1.5 Indicators
Scope of indications depends on the type of trip unit.
Trip unit is activated
I > Imin
- or when 24 V auxiliary power is applied.
Imin:
-80 A for frame size II
- 150 A for frame size III
Flashing LED
Overcurrent alarm
-Steady LED, if
I IR
Communication active
- Another CublicleBUS module has been
recognized and communication started.
Extended protective function has tripped
- due to metering function
- trip cause saved in event memory
- trip cause readable via:
˘ BDA
˘ PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS
˘ graphical display (ETU776)
˘ external digital output modules
9 – 11
Protective function has tripped
(overcurrent)
- Indicator lights up when the Query
button is pressed
- Only one trip cause is displayed
- Only the last trip cause is
displayed
or
LED T.U. ERROR
1. T.U. Error flashes:
Limited protective function, the protective
parameters are reset to minimum values.
Causes:
- Rated current of the rating plug is higher than
that of the circuit breaker
- Rotary coding switch in undefined
intermediate position
- Trip unit defective
2. T.U. Error lights up continuously:
Protective function not available.
Causes:
- Rating plug not compatible with
circuit breaker type
- Trip unit defective
9 – 12
9.1.6 Protective functions
9.1.6.1 Basic protective functions
The basic protective functions of the trip unit are ensured without additional auxiliary voltage. The required energy is supplied by the
circuit breaker's internal energy transformers.
To evaluate the currents, the electronic system of the trip unit calculates the r.m.s value.
The individual functions are parameterized according to the types via:
- rotary coding switch (ETU745 - 748)
- electronic data transfer (ETU776) via:
-the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS
- the control board (ETU776)
Overload protection – L-tripping
The current setting IR defines the maximum continuous current the circuit breaker can carry without tripping. The long-time delay tR
determines the maximum duration of an overload without tripping.
The tripping characteristic is an I2t characteristic. Some trip units can be switched over to an I4t characteristic.
(page 9-15)
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping
On trip units ETU745 - 776, tripping due to the short-circuit current Isd can be delayed by the time tsd.
This provides selectivity for short-circuit protection in switchgear with several grading levels.
1) The delay time 0.02 sec. is not an I2t function.
The motor protection function is activated in this position.
2) For settings tsd >0.4 sec., the maximum possible setting Isd is reduced automatically according to the frame size:
Frame size II : 20 kA
Frame size III : 30 kA
The setting "OFF" for trip units ETU745 and ETU776 is provided to deactivate the short-time delayed short-circuit protection.
If the zone selective interlocking (ZSI) (page 9-15) is used and the ZSI module is set to "S" or "S+G" the adjusted delay time tsd is auto-
matically set to 50 ms provided that in the event of short-circuit the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal from a downstream
circuit breaker. In this case regardless of the adjusted tsd value the circuit breaker will trip after 50 ms.
If a blocking signal exists the adjusted delay time tsd is valid. For safety reasons after 3 s the blocking signal is terminated.
Some trip units can be switched over to an I2t-characteristic. (page 9-16)
Setting values for IR
ETU745 - 748 IR = (0.4 / 0.45 / 0.5 / 0.55 / 0.6 / 0.65 / 0.7 / 0.8 / 0.9 / 1.0) x In
ETU776 IR = (0.4 - 1.0) x In (given in Amps)
Setting values for tR
ETU745 - 748 tR = 2 / 3.5 / 5.5 / 8 / 10 / 14 / 17 / 21 / 25 / 30 sec. (at 6 x IR)
ETU776 tR = 2 - 30 sec. (at 6 x IR)
Setting values for Isd
ETU745 - 748 Isd = (1.25 / 1.5 / 2 / 2.5 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12) x In
ETU776 Isd = 1.25 x In - 0.8 x ICW
(given in Amps)
Setting values for tsd
ETU745 tsd = 0.02(M)1) / 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 sec.; OFF
ETU748 tsd = 0.02(M)1) / 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 sec.
ETU776 tsd = 0.02(M)1) / 0.08 - 4 sec.2); OFF
9 – 13
Motor protection function
In the circuit breaker position tsd = 0.02 sec., a special protection function for electromotive drives is activated. It prevents the short-time
delayed short-circuit tripping from being activated during the switch-on current peak of electric motors. At the same time, a phase failure
protection is activated (page 9-14) and the time constant for the internally calculated reproduction of the temperature rise and cooling
process is switched over from switchgear protection to motor protection.
Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping
If the current setting Ii is exceeded, the circuit breaker is tripped instantaneously.
Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping
If the trip unit is equipped with a ground-fault protection module, loads can be protected against impermissibly high ground-fault currents.
Trip units ETU745 - 776 can be equipped with it optionally. Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-45)
The response value Ig, together with the setting for the delay time tg, determines the shutdown of ground-fault currents.
If the zone selective interlocking (ZSI) (page 9-15) is used and the ZSI module is set to "S" or "S+G" the adjusted delay time tg is auto-
matically set to 100 ms provided that in the event of ground-fault the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal from a downstream
circuit breaker. In this case regardless of the adjusted tg value the circuit breaker will trip after 100 ms.
If a blocking signal exists the adjusted delay time tg is valid. For safety reasons after 3 s the blocking signal is terminated. Some trip units
can be switched over to an I2t-characteristic.
Setting values for Ii
ETU745 OFF: Ii = ICW
Ii = (1.5 / 2.2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12 × In
MAX = 0.8 x ICW
ETU748 Ii > ICW
ETU776 Ii = 1.5 x In - 0.8 x Ics ; OFF : Ii = ICW
Setting values for Ig
Frame size
II III
A100 A 400 A
B300 A 600 A
C600 A 800 A
D900 A 1000 A
E1200 A 1200 A
Setting values for tg
ETU745 - 748 tg = 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 / 0.5 sec.
ETU776 tg = 0.1 - 0.5 sec.
M
9 – 14
Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping
Trip units ETU745 - 776 also make it possible to protect the neutral conductor against overload. This requires a current transformer for the
neutral conductor, which can be retrofitted if necessary. (page 9-91)
For tripping, the same long-time delay tR applies as for overload tripping.
9.1.6.2 Additional functions
Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding)
Trip units ETU745 - ETU776 offer the possibility of additional load monitoring. Two current values, "load shedding" and "load restore", as
well as a delay time tx, can be set.
If the setting value "load restore" is undershot, and the lower limit value for current transmission is exceeded at the same time, a signal is
output by the CublicleBUS after the set delay time tx has elapsed. If the setting value "load shedding" is exceeded, a signal is output by the
CublicleBUS after the set delay time tx has elapsed. These signals can be used to connect or disconnect loads, thereby preventing an over-
load tripping of incoming circuit breakers.
Load monitoring can be adjusted via:
- the alphanumeric display (ETU745 - 748)
- the graphical display (ETU776)
-the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP
-the MODBUS.
Leading signal for L-tripping
Trip units ETU745 - 776 provide a leading signal for "L-tripping", which is transmitted via the CublicleBUS 100 milliseconds before overload
tripping. In this way it is possible e.g. to disconnect thyristor controllers.
Phase failure protection
Trip units ETU776, the phase failure protection can also be activated when the motor protection is not activated.
If the phase failure protection is activated and the operating current of the lowest loaded phase is 50% lower than the operating current of
the highest loaded phase, the setting value IR is automatically reduced to 80%. If the values of the three phase currents differ by less than
50%, the setting IR applies again.
Setting values for IN
ETU745 - 748 IN = (0.5 / 1.0) × In; OFF
ETU776 IN = (0.2 - 2.0) × In; OFF
NOTICE
Neutral Conductor Overheating.
Neutral conductor or insulation may be damaged.
Settings IN > 1 x In should only be used if the neutral conductor has been properly sized.
Setting values for load monitoring
"Load shedding" and "load restore" 40 A - 1.5 x In
Delay time tx = 1 - 15 sec.
9 – 15
Thermal memory can be switched On/Off
Trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to continue with the internally calculated reproduction of the thermal processes in downstream
switchgear and consumers even if the circuit breaker is open and the electronic system has no external supply. In this way, an effective
protection against thermal overload can also be guaranteed for frequent closing and opening processes.
The thermal memory can be activated via:
- a slide switch (ETU745, ETU748)
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the BDA (ETU776)
-the PROFIBUS-DP (ETU776)
- the MODBUS (ETU776).
Zone selective interlocking
If the circuit breaker is combined with a ZSI module (page 9-82), a short-circuit occurring in systems with several grading levels can be
precisely localized.
For this purpose, all circuit breakers are interconnected through their ZSI-modules.
When a short-circuit occurs, each circuit breaker affected by the short-circuit current queries its downstream circuit breaker to determine
whether the short-circuit is also present in the next downstream grading level. In the direction of the energy flow, only the circuit breaker
nearest to the short-circuit is tripped. A delay time which may have been set for the short-circuit tripping is deactivated. However, tripping
takes place after 50 milliseconds at the earliest.
Overload protection switchable to I4t
Trip units ETU745 and ETU776 make it possible to switch over from the I2t to an I4t inverse-time function for overload protection by means of
a slide switch. This improves the selectivity of the overload protection in combination with fuses.
In this case, the setting options for the long delay time tR change as follows:
Setting values for tR
ETU745 - 748 tR = 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 sec. (at 6 x IR)
ETU776 tR = 1- 5 sec. (at 6 x IR)
9 – 16
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t
Trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to switch over from a constant delay time to an I2t-characteristic. In this way, the delay time
depends on the short-circuit current, but with a constant I2tsd-value, providing better coordination with downstream fuses.
In this case, the setting options for the short-time delay tR are as follows:
Switchover to the I2tsd characteristic can be made via:
-the t
sd rotary coding switch (ETU745 - 748); this must be set to a value in the white area.
.
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the BDA (ETU776)
-the PROFIBUS-DP (ETU776)
- the MODBUS (ETU776).
Changeable parameter sets
Trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to store two different parameter sets for protective functions.
This enables new protection settings to be adopted when a transfer to another supply source takes place.
Switchover can be made manually via:
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the test socket with the BDA
or automatically via:
-the CublicleBUS with an input signal at the digital input module.
-the PROFIBUS-DP
-the MODBUS.
Settings for tsd
ETU745 - 748 tsd = 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 sec. (at 12 x In)
ETU776 tsd = 0.1 - 0.4 sec. (bei 12 x In)
9 – 17
Ground-fault protection switchable to I2t characteristic
The ground-fault protection modules for trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to switch over from a constant delay time to an
I2t characteristic.
This provides an inverse-time tripping characteristic with a constant I2tg value, providing better selectivity of the ground-fault protection in
systems with several grading levels.
The setting options for the delay time remain unchanged.
Switchover to the I2tg characteristic can be made via:
-the t
g rotary coding switch (ETU745 - 748);
this must be set to a value in the white area.
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the BDA (ETU776)
-the PROFIBUS-DP (ETU776)
- the MODBUS (ETU776).
Ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-45)
9 – 18
9.1.7 ETU displays
9.1.7.1 Alphanumeric display
Trip units ETU745 and ETU748 can be retrofitted with an alphanumeric display.
Overview
(1) Screen (4 lines with 20 characters each)
(2) Up key
(3) Down key
9 – 19
Field installation
The trip units ETU745 and ETU748 can be field installed with an alphanumeric display.
- OPEN circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Disconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
- Remove sealing cap of trip unit, if applicable (page 9-53)
Removing dummy flange
Installing display and latching it tight
- Fit and seal trip unit sealing cap, if applicable (page 9-53)
- Reconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
1
2
34
5
1
2
3
9 – 20
Modifying the angle of the display
At the factory, the alphanumeric display is installed with a downward inclination. However, it can be turned in a vertical direction by 180°, the
display is then inclined upwards.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Disconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
- Remove trip unit sealing cap, if applicable (page 9-53)
Removing the display
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
5
1
2
3
4
9 – 22
Menu structure ETU745 - 748
After the supply voltage has been applied, the display changes from "Power-up screen" to "Autoscroll" mode after about 5 sec. Thereafter,
further modes can be accessed by means of the two buttons.
Overview
"Autoscroll" mode
During normal operation, the display is in "Autoscroll" mode
In this mode, the display automatically changes to the next screen every 5 seconds.
If there is no measurement module available, the display changes continuously back and forth between screens 1 and 2.
If there is a measurement module available, a total of five screens are displayed in "Autoscroll" mode.
To access "Autoscroll" mode, press the following button(s)
In "Fixed screen display" mode
In "Tripping counter reset" mode
In "Contrast setting" mode
In "Parameter setting" mode Do not press any button for 10 seconds
In "Tripping info" mode
Start
Power-up-screen
Mode "Autoscroll" Mode "Parameter setting"
Mode "Contrast setting"
Mode
"Fixed screen display"
5s
10 s
0483_u
++
or
+
9 – 23
Mode "Fixed screen display"
Screens displayed in "Autoscroll" mode
without measurement module
Screen 1
Current I1
Current I2
Current I3
Current IN
Screen 2
Ground-fault current Ig
(A value is only displayed if a
ground-fault protection mod-
ule is fitted.)
with metering module installed, additionally
Screen 3
Active power P
Apparent power S
Reactive power Q
Power factor
Screen 4
Voltage V12
Voltage V23
Voltage V31
Screen 5
Energy (positive direction)
Energy (negative direction)
Present direction of energy
flow
Frequency
NOTE
The data to be displayed are updated every time the screen page is set up again. No updates take place when a screen page is being
displayed.
Button functions in "Autoscroll" mode
Display is frozen;
Switchover to
"Fixed screen display" mode
Change to
"Parameter setting" mode
Change to
"Contrast setting" mode
I1....=......00000.A
I2....=......00000.A
IN....=......00000.A
I3....=......00000.A
Ig....=......00000.A
KW...=.±..00000.kW
KVA..=....00000.kVA
KVAR.
PF...=.±..0,000.xxxx
=.±..00000.kVAR
V12.=.........0000.V
V
V23.=.........0000.V
31.=.........0000.V
W. .=...00000,00.MWh
W. .=...00000,00.
PowerFlowDir.......
f...=........00,0 Hz
MWh
+
9 – 24
In this mode, maintenance information is provided with the number of circuit breaker trips and switching operations as well as with
maintenance instructions. The information displayed depends on the number of circuit breaker trips operations.
"Tripping counter reset" submode
This mode makes it possible to reset the counter for the trips and the switching operations to zero.
To access "Fixed screen display" mode, press the following
button:
In "Autoscroll" mode
Number of trips
Number of switching
operations
Number of trips
Number of switching
operations
Maintenance instructions
Button functions in "Fixed screen display" mode
Change to next higher screen
level
Change to "Autoscroll" mode
Change to "Tripping counter reset"
mode
NOTE
The counter should only be reset after contact maintenance.
If the counter is reset without contact maintenance having been performed, the maintenance information displayed will not correspond to
the actual condition of the contacts.
To access "Tripping counter reset mode", press the following
button(s)
In the "Fixed screen display" mode
Screens displayed in "Tripping counter reset" mode
Screen 1
This screen is used for safety
queries.
Reset the counter after contact
maintenance only.
Num.of.Trips...00000
Num.of.Ops.....00000
Num.of.Trips...00000
Num.of.Ops.....00000
Prepare for contact
maintenance
+
+
Reset.Trips.and.Ops
Counter?
yes:. +
no:. .or.
9 – 25
Screen 2
Counter reset for trips and
switching operations con-
firmed.
Button functions in "Tripping counter reset" mode
If screen 1 is displayed
Canceling, no counter reset to
zero
Change to "Autoscroll" mode
Counter reset to zero
Change to screen 2
If screen 2 is displayed
Change to "Autoscroll" mode
Screens displayed in "Tripping counter reset" mode
Trips.and.Ops
Counter.reset
continue:. .or.
or
+
or
9 – 26
"Parameter setting" mode
In this mode, the following parameters can be adjusted:
- load shedding
- load restore
- delay time for load shedding/load restore
- language setting for display
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
To access "Parameter setting" mode, press the following button(s):
In "Autoscroll" mode
Screens displayed in "Parameter setting" mode
Screen 1
Setting
Load shedding
Screen 2
Setting
Load restore
Screen 3
Setting
Delay time
Load shedding/load restore
Screen 4
Setting
Display language
XXXX may be ENGL or GERM
Screen 5
Parameter settings are being
changed, switches to "Auto-
scroll" mode after 10 seconds
NOTE
When screen 1, 2, 3 or 4 is displayed and no key is pressed within 10 seconds, "Parameter setting" mode is canceled.
Any parameter changes performed are not accepted. Display switches back to "Autoscroll" mode
Change Parameters
Load.Shed..=.0000.A
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
Change Parameters
Load.Restore=.0000.A
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
Change Parameters
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
tx..........=...00.s
Change Parameters
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
Sprache/Lang=...XXXX
Changed.Parameter
being.saved,
wait.10s
9 – 27
"Contrast setting" mode
In this mode, the contrast of the display can be adjusted.
"Tripping info" screen
This mode will automatically be activated as soon as a trip occurs, provided an external 24 V DC voltage supply has been connected.
1) Measurement function
To access "Contrast setting" mode, press the following
button(s):
In "Autoscroll" mode
Screens displayed in "Contrast setting" mode
Screen 1
Contrast setting
The longer the bar, the higher
the contrast
Button functions in "Contrast setting" mode
Increases the contrast
Reduces the contrast
Accept the contrast,
switch to the "Autoscroll" mode
Screens displayed in "Tripping info" mode
Tripping type
Phase affected
XX may be:
L, S, I, G, N, M1)
YY may be:
L1, L2, L3,
Button functions in "Tripping info" mode
Display of maintenance
instructions
If pressed again:
Switches back to "Tripping info"
mode
Press CLEAR button
Switches to "Autoscroll" mode
+
Contrast Adjust
0 50 100 %
+ - Enter
+
or
9 – 28
"Display parameter changes" screen
The display automatically switches to this mode when a parameter has been changed via the rotary coding switches, provided an external
24 V DC voltage supply has been connected.
Screens displayed in "Display parameter changes" mode
Display of the changed value
Displayed technical data and units
IR
ISD
Ii
IN
Ig
Ig.alarm
tg
I^2tg
I^2tR
I^4tR
tSD
I^2tSD
th.mem
Current for overload tripping
Current for short-time delayed short-circuit tripping
Current for instantaneous short-circuit tripping
Current for overload protection of the N conductor
Current for ground-fault protection tripping
(this is only displayed if ground-fault protection module is available)
Response current for ground-fault protection alarm indicator
(this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)
Delay time for ground-fault protection (this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)
Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) of ground-fault protection (this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)
Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) for overload tripping
Inverse-time delay (I4t-dependent) for overload tripping
Delay time for short-circuit tripping
Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) for short-circuit tripping
Indicates whether thermal memory is On/Off
Button functions in "Display parameter changes" mode
The changed value is displayed for 4 seconds. The display then switches back to the previous mode.
Parameter changed:
XXXXXX.=...000000.YY
Ch
ange
d
d
a
t
a Un
it
IR.....=....00000.YY A
ISD....=....00000.YY A
Ii.....=....00000.YY A
IN.....=....00000.YY A
Ig.....=.....0000.YY A
Ig.alarm.=...0000.YY A
tg.....=......000.YY ms
I^2tg..=......000.YY ms
I^2tR..=......000.YY s
I^4tR..=........0.YY s
tSD....=......000.YY ms
I^2tSD.=......000.YY ms
th.mem.=.........YYY ..
9 – 29
9.1.7.2 Graphical display
The ETU776 trip unit equipped with a fixed-mounted graphical display as standard. This display enables a text output with a maximum of
8 lines or the graphical representation of characteristics.
It is used both to display data as well as to parameterize the trip unit and the measurement function. The display is operated via the
operating keys provided on the trip unit.
(1) Graphical display
(2) Operating keys
Display overview
(1) Menu title
(2) 8-line alphanumeric display or graphical representation of characteristics
(3) Status line
Status line
The status line shows, by means of bold symbols, which actions the operator can carry out and which settings are currently active at this
moment.
(1) Access with password only
(2) Maintenance required
(3) Set parameter set for protective functions
(4) Editing option
(5) Set trigger
(6) Possible actions by the operator
(1)
(2)
PAR
ATRIG
AB ESC
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
9 – 30
Representation of bar diagrams
The measured values for some parameters are displayed both as numerical values and graphically in the form of a bar diagram.
(1) Lowest measured value
(2) Present measured value
(3) Current measured valuee
(4) 100% of the measured parameter
(5) Width of display
The markings for the lowest and highest measured value are automatically updated during the measurement.
Display during operation
After the supply voltage is applied, the display switches from the "power up screen" to the operational screen after approximately 5 seconds.
It shows the currents in the three phases and in the neutral conductor as numerical values and in the form of a bar diagram. The background
illumination of the display is automatically switched off after approximately 1 minute. It can be switched on again by pressing any button.
Polling the main menu
(any key)
(esc)
screen saver
times out
(esc) or screen saver times out (enter)
9 – 31
Navigating in the menu structure
Use the operating keys to navigate in the menu structure.
Selection of a menu item
Button functions
Shift the marking
Select the marked menu item
Switch back to the previous menu
9 – 32
Displaying measured values
Example 1: Displaying the currents
Example 2: Displaying the frequency
MAI N MENU METERI NG CURRENT I L1
Me t e r i n g I avg = 752 A I L1 = 765 A IL1 min
= 706 A
Di agnost i c U
avg = 401 V 28- JAN- 03
Vi ew Par amet er P =+ 277 I L2 = 758 A 16: 29: 32. 01
Change Par amet er S = 302 kVA
I dent i f i cat i on Q =+ 120kVAR I L3 = 750 A I L1 max
= 788 A
Cl ear pf avg= 0. 918 l ag 04- JAN- 03
Di spl ay Set up
W
=+ 21207M
W
hr I N= 0 A 0 8: 5 9: 3 8. 2 1
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz
METERI NG CURRENT
Uavg = 401 V I g=5A
P =+ 277
S = 302 kVA I avg = 752 A
Q =+ 120kVAR
pf avg= 0. 918 l ag I avgl t = 752 A
W
=+ 21207M
W
hr
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz Unbal . = 10
%
Temp = 225. 0 F
(enter)(esc)
kW
(down 8x) (up 8x) (down 7x) (up 7x)
kW
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
MAI N MENU MET ERI NG FREQUENCY FREQ
Me t e r i n g Iavg = 752 A Fr eq = 50. 02 Hz fmi n = 50. 02 Hz
Di agnost i c U
avg = 401 V 28- JAN- 03
Vi ew Par amet er P =+ 277 I THD =10
%
16: 29: 32. 01
Change Par amet er S = 302 kVA
I dent i f i cat i on Q =+ 120kVAR U
THD =10 % f
max = 50. 02 Hz
Cl ear pf avg= 0. 918 l ag 04- JAN- 03
Di spl ay Set up W =+21207M
W
hr For m F= 4. 0 08: 59: 38. 21
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz Cr est F= 4. 0
METERI NG F REQUENCY
Uavg = 401 V Har moni cs
P =+ 277
S = 302 kVA
Q =+ 120kVAR
pf avg= 0. 918 l ag
W =+ 21207M
W
hr
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz
Temp = 225. 0 F
(enter)(esc)
k W
(up 8x) (down5x) (up 5x)(down 8x)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
kW
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 33
Example 3: Displaying harmonics
Displaying parameters
Example 4: Displaying parameters parameter settings
MAI N MENU MET ERI NG FREQUENCY
Me t e r i n g Iavg = 752 A freq =50.02Hz
Di agnost i c U
avg = 401 V
Vi ew Par amet er P =+ 277 I THD =10 %
Change Par amet er S = 302 kVA
I dent i f i cat i on Q =+ 120kVAR U
THD =10 %
Cl ear pf avg= 0. 918 l ag
Di spl ay Set up W =+21207M
W
hr For m F= 4. 0
(esc)
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz Cr est F= 4. 0
METERI NG F REQUENCY HARMONI CS
Uavg = 401 V Har moni cs Iavg Uavg
P =+ 277 THD 10. 0% 10. 0%
S = 3 0 2 k VA 2 0. 0% 0. 0%
Q =+ 120kVAR 3 0. 0% 0. 0%
pf avg= 0. 9 1 8 l a g 4 0. 0% 0. 0%
W =+ 21207M
W
hr 5 9.0% 9.0%
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz 6 0. 0% 0. 0%
Te mp = 2 2 5. 0 F 7 3. 0% 3. 0%
HARMONI CS
2 2 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 3 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 4 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 5 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 6 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 7 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 8 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 9 0. 0% 0. 0%
(esc)
(enter)
(enter)(esc)
kW
(down 8x) (up 8x) (down5x) (up 5x)
k W
(down 28x) (up 28x)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
MAI N MENU VI EW PARAMETER PROT. PAR. SET B L Tr i p
Met er i ng Syst em Conf i g. Tr i p = 1000 A St a t us = On
Di agnost i c Pr ot . Par . Set A S Tr i p = 8500 s Pi ckup= 1000 A
Vi e w Pa r a me t er Pr ot . Par . Se t B I Tr i p =14400 A Del ay = 4. 8 s
Change Par amet er Met er i ng N Tr i p = 120 A I * t = I 4t
I dent i f i cat i on Set poi nt s G Pr ot ec= 500 A
Cl ear Communi cat i on Ther mMem= Of f
Di spl ay Set up PhaseSen= On
Tau = 100
(esc)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
(enter)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 34
Example 5: Displaying active power
Calling up diagnostic information
Example 6: Querying maintenance information
MAI N ME NU ME T E RI N G P O
W
ER P av g
Me t e r i n g Iavg = 752 A P
L1 =+ 278 P
avgmi n=+ 252
Di agnost i c U
avg = 401 V P
L2 =+ 277 28- JAN- 01
Vi e w Pa r amet e r P =+ 277 PL3 =+ 279 16: 29: 32. 01
Change Par amet er S = 302 kVA Pavg =+ 277
I dent i f i cat i on Q =+ 120kVAR P
avgmax=+ 302
Cl ear pf avg= 0. 918 l ag 04- JAN- 01
Di spl ay Set up W =+21207M
W
hr 08: 59: 38. 21
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz
(esc)
METERI NG
Uavg = 401 V
P =+ 277
S = 302 kVA
Q =+ 120kVAR
pf avg= 0. 918 l ag
W =+ 21207M
W
hr
f r eq = 50. 02 Hz
Temp = 225. 0 F
k W
k W
(down 8x) (up 8x)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
(enter)(esc)
k W
k W
k W
k W
k W
k W
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
MAI N MENU DI AGNOST I C MAI NT ENANCE
Me t e r i n g
W
ar ni ngs Tot al Ops = 227
Di agnost i c Trip Log Ops w/load= 125
Vi ew Par amet er Set poi nt s SI Tr i ps = 2
Change Par amet er Mai nt enance LTrips= 1
I dent i f i cat i on Cubi cl eBUS g Tr i ps = 5
Cl ear
W
avef or m Op Hour s = 13254
Di spl ay Set up I nt . Faul t = 8
Sum I 2tL1= 3
MAI NT ENANCE CONTACT EROSI ON
gTrips= 5
Op Hour s = 13254 After Trip
I nt . Faul t = 8 check cont act s
Sum I 2tL1= 3
Sum I 2tL2= 3
Sum I 2tL3= 3
Sum I 2tN= 0
Cont act Er osi on
(esc)
(enter)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
(down 11x) (up11x)
(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 35
Example 7: Adjusting representation of characteristics
MAI N MENU DI AGNOST I C
W
AVEFORM
Me t e r i n g
W
ar ni ngs
W
avef or m Set up
Di agnost i c Tr i p Log Di spl ay
W
avef or m
Vi ew Par amet er Set poi nt s
Change Par amet er Mai nt enance
I dent i f i cat i on Cubi cal BUS
Cl ear
W
avef or m
Di spl ay Set up
TR I GGER TR I P EVENT PROT . PARAMETERS
Trip Event Prot. Parameters L Trip
Set poi nt Event Cur r ent S Tr i p
Overload Voltage I Trip
No Tr i gger Real Power G Tr i p
Fr equency N Tr i p
POSI TI ON POSI TI ON POSI TI ON
0s 1s 0s 1s 0s 1s
Pre Trig Pre Trig Pre Trig
0. 80 s 0. 30 s 0. 3 0 s
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)(enter)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
(down 5X)
T T T
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 36
W
AVEFORM SETUP SET TRI GGER A
Set Tr i gger A Tr i gger =
Set Tr i gger B L Tr i p
Posi t i on=
0s 1s
Reset / St ar t
SET TRI GGER A
Tr i gger =
L Tr i p
Posi t i on=
0s 1s
Reset / St ar t
SET TRI GGER A RESET/ START
Tr i gger =
L Tr i p Tr i gger A
Now Moni t or i ng
Posi t i on=
0s 1s
Reset / St ar t
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(esc)
(enter)
(esc)
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
3 sec.
T
T
T
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 37
Example 8: Selecting event for displaying characteristics
MAI N MENU DI AGNOST I C
W
AVEFORM
Me t e r i n g
W
ar ni ngs
W
avef or m Set up
Di agnost i c Tr i p Log Di spl ay
W
avef or m
Vi ew Par amet er Set poi nt s
Change Par amet er Mai nt enance
I dent i f i cat i on Cubi cal BUS
Cl ear
W
avef or m
Di spl ay Set up
CURRENTS UPLOAD A EVEN TS
Upl oad A Event s
Upl oad B Event s Pl ease
W
ait...
Upload In
Pr ocess
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(goto "DISPLAY
GRAPH" in example 9)
(enter) (enter)(esc) (esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 38
DI SPLAY
W
AVEFORM EVENT UPLOAD
Event Upl oad Cur r ent s
Di spl ay Gr aph Cur r ent s + G & N
Vol t ages
UPLOAD A EVEN TS
Tr i gger Has
Not Occur r ed
(enter)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter) 5 sec.
(enter)(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 39
Example 9: Displaying characteristics
MAI N MENU DI AGNOST I C
Me t e r i n g
W
ar ni ngs
Di agnost i c Tr i p Log
Vi ew Par amet er Set poi nt s
Change Par amet er Mai nt enance
I dent i f i cat i on Cubi cl eBUS
Cl ear
W
avef or m
Di spl ay Set up
DI SPLAY
W
AVEF ORM DI SPL AY GRAPH
Event Upl oad
Display Graph
Tr i gger A
Currents
Recor ded
DI SPLAY GRAPH
No Da t a
Available
Pl ease Upl oad
Event
(enter)
5 sec.
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
5 sec.(enter)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 40
W
AVEFORM
W
avef or m Set up
Di spl ay
W
avef or m
I L1
W
AVEFORM I L1
W
AVEFORM I L1
W
AVEFORM
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
Lg Lg Lg
LN LN LN
IL1
=0AI
L1
= - 100, 000 A I L1
= - 100, 000 A
t= 0. 000 s t= +0. 008 s t= +0. 008 s
I L2
W
AVEFORM
L1
L3
Lg
LN
IL2
= - 80, 000 A
t= +0. 008 s
(esc) goes to "DISPLAY WAVEFORM" menu
(enter)
(esc)
(enter 8X)
(down 2X)
(enter)
X
X
T
X
X
T T
TT T
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
X
T
T
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 41
Changing parameters
Example 10: Setting protection parameters
Settings the display
Example 11: Entering password
MAI N MENU CHANGE PARAMET ER PROT. PAR. SET B
Met er i ng Syst em Conf i g. Tr i p = 1000 A
Di agnost i c Pr ot . Par . Set A S Tr i p = 8500 s
Vi e w Pa r amet e r Pr ot . Pa r . Se t B I Tr i p = 14400 A
Change Par amet er Meteri ng N Tri p = 120 A
I dent i f i cat i on Set poi nt s G Pr ot ec= 500 A
Cl ear Communi cat i on Ther mMem= Of f
Di spl ay Set up PhaseSen= On
Tau = 100
PROT. PAR. SET B PROT. PAR. SET B
Parameter Change Parameter Change
Not Saved ! ! Saved
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
MAI N MENU DI SPLAY SETUP PASS
W
ORD
Met er i ng Syst em Ti me Ent er New Pswr d
Di agnost i c Language
Vi e w Pa r amet e r Passwor d ****
Change Par amet er Scr een Saver
I dent i f i cat i on Cont r ast
Clear Temp Unit
Di spl ay Set up
(esc)
PASS
W
ORD PASS
W
ORD
(enter) Passwor d Passwor d
Change NOT Saved Change Saved
(esc)
(esc)
(enter)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 42
LTrip LTrip LTrip
St a t us= On St a t us= On St a t us= On
Pi ckup= 1000 A Pi ckup= 1000 A Pi ckup= 950 A
De l a y = 4. 8 s De l a y = 4. 8 s De l a y = 4. 8 s
I*t = I 4t I*t= I
4t I*t= I
4t
PROT. PAR. SET B
(enter) Save Par amet er
Changes?
= YES
ESC= No
(all greyed except key & pencil)
(esc)
(enter)
(down)
(enter)
(esc)
(esc)
(enter)
(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PASS
W
ORD PASS
W
ORD
En t e r Ne w Ps wr d E n t e r Ne w P s wr d
7** * 7265
12345678910111213141516
PASS
W
ORD
(enter) Save Changes?
= YES
ESC= No
(esc)
(enter)
(esc)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 43
Identifications
Example 12: Identifications
Resetting
Example 13: Resetting the measured minimum and maximum values
MAI N MENU I DENTI F I CAT I ON T RI P UNI T S/ N
Met er i ng Tr i p Uni t Par t # 423812675238
Di agnost i c Trip Unit S/N
Vi ew Par amet er Test I nf o.
Change Par amet er User Gi ven I D#
I dent i f i cat i on User Comment
Cl ear
Di spl ay Set up
(enter)(esc)
(enter)(esc)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
ESC
MAI N MENU CLEAR
Met er i ng Cur r ent Faul t
Di agnost i c Mi n / Ma x B u f f e r
Vi ew Par amet er Temp Mi n/ Max
Change Par amet er Tr i p Log
I dent i f i cat i on Mai nt enance I nf o
Cl ear
Di spl ay Set up
MI N/ MAX BUFF ER MI N/ MAX BUF F ER MI N/ MAX BUFF ER
Min/Max Buffer Min/Max Buffer Are You Sure You
NOT Reset ! ! Reset
W
ant To Reset ?
= YES
ESC= No
(enter)
(esc)
(enter)(esc)
(enter)
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
PAR
A
TRIG
AB
9 – 44
9.1.8 Rating plug
The rating plug defines the rated current In within a certain range for a given circuit breaker frame size.
If a rating plug with a higher current than the maximum permissible circuit breaker rated continuous current is plugged in, the electronic
system of the trip unit recognizes this error and signals it with a flashing T.U. ERROR indicator.
The trip unit ignores the rated current value specified by the incorrect rating plug and sets it to the value of the smallest rating plug for the
frame size of the relevant circuit breaker.
The same happens if a circuit breaker with frame size III is equipped with a rating plug smaller than 800 A.
All set protection parameters are adjusted accordingly.
It is not permitted to operate the trip unit without a rating plug. If a circuit breaker is nevertheless started up without a rating plug,
the T.U. ERROR indicator will light up and the trip unit settings will default to the lowest possible settings for that frame rating.
Frame size Rating plug Catalog No.
II III
q200 A WLRP200
q225 A WLRP225
q250 A WLRP250
q300 A WLRP300
q315 A WLRP315
q350 A WLRP350
q400 A WLRP400
q450 A WLRP450
q500 A WLRP500
q600 A WLRP600
q630 A WLRP630
q700 A WLRP700
q q 800 A WLRP800
q q 1000 A WLRP1000
q q 1200 A WLRP1200
q q 1250 A WLRP1250
q q 1600 A WLRP1600
q q 2000 A WLRP2000
q q 2500 A WLRP2500
q q 3000 A WLRP3000
q q 3200 A WLRP3200
q4000 A WLRP4000
q5000 A WLRP5000
9 – 45
Replacing rating plug
9.1.9 Ground-fault protection modules
Various trip units can be optionally equipped with ground-fault protection modules. The following ground-fault protection modules cannot be
removed once they have been installed.
Depending on the ground-fault protection module version, the set value being exceeded will cause either an alarm only or an alarm and a
trip at the same time. (page 9-13)
The following device combinations are possible:
The following options exist for ground-fault detection:
- vectorial summation of the phase currents or vectorial summation of the phase currents and the neutral conductor current if a
neutral sensor is used
- Direct measurement of the ground-fault current using a separate 1200 A : 1 A ground-fault sensor
Input current carrying capacity of the ground-fault protection module:
-max. 1 A continuous
-max. 5 A for 0.5 sec.
Alarm and tripped signals can be transmitted via the c, PROFIBUS-DP and MODBUS.
Module GFM A 745
- Alarm only, circuit breaker does not trip
- The changeover switch for ground-fault detection is only accessible when the control panel or the trip unit itself is removed.
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
Trip unit Ground-fault protection module
ETU745 - 748 GFM A 745-748
GFM AT 745-748
ETU776 GFM A 776
GFM AT 776
2
3
OPEN
1
Rotary coding switch for ground-fault
alarm setting value
Ground-fault alarm indicator
Rotary coding switch for ground-fault
delay setting tg / I2tg
Changeover switch for ground-fault
detection
9 – 46
Module GFM AT 745
- Ground-fault protection by circuit breaker tripping and alarm signal
- Changeover switch for ground-fault protection accessible only when the control panel or the trip unit itself is removed
Module GFM A 776
- Alarm only, circuit breaker does not trip
- Module programmable via:
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the BDA (ETU776)
-the PROFIBUS-DP (ETU776)
- the MODBUS (ETU776).
Module GFM AT 776
- Ground-fault protection by circuit breaker tripping and alarm signal
- Module programmable via:
- the graphical display (ETU776)
- the BDA (ETU776)
-the PROFIBUS-DP (ETU776).
- the MODBUS (ETU776).
- Ground-fault detection selectable:
- vectorial summation I = L1+L2+L3+N
- external iron core ground-fault current sensor 1200 A : 1 A
Rotary coding switch for ground-fault
protection setting value
Rotary coding switch for ground-fault
alarm setting value
Indicators
ground-fault alarm
ground-fault tripped
Rotary coding switch for ground-fault
delay setting tg / I2tg
Changeover switch for ground-fault
detection
Ground-fault detection mode
Labeling areas for recording
setting values
Labeling areas for recording
setting values
Ground-fault alarm indicator
Ground-fault detection mode
Labeling areas for recording
setting values
Indicators
G ALARM
G tripped
Labeling areas for recording
setting values
9 – 47
Field installation
Removing dummy module
Installing and snapping the ground-fault protection module into place
- Switch on external 24 V DC voltage supply, if planned
- Adjust settings for ground-fault protection
- Test the tripping function with the handheld test device (page 9-97)
- Install and seal sealing cap of trip unit, if applicable (page 9-53)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
3
2
1
3
2
1
9 – 48
Catalog numbers
NOTE
Once the ground-fault-module is snapped into place, it cannot be removed.
Ground-fault protection module Catalog No.
GFM A 745-748 WLGFA48
GFM AT 745-748 WLGFM48
GFM A 776 WLGFA76
GFM AT 776 WLGFM76
9 – 49
9.1.10 Replace the trip unit
Removing
- OPEN circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
2
3
During installation
1
5Nm
44 lb-inPH 2
5
4
9 – 50
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
After replacing the trip unit, always test with the handheld test device (page 9-97)
For ordering trip units, please refer to the latest version of the "Selection and Application Guide" WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
catalog.
If a trip unit with another configuration than the existing one is installed, the Catalog No. on the options label of the circuit breaker must be
changed according to the catalog data.
Please contact the technical assistance hotline if you have any queries.
Remove connectors
N sensor 1)
1) Equipment dependent on type
Current sensors
Energy transducer
BSS module 1)
6
X21
X24
X20
7
8
PH 1
1,2 ± 0,3 Nm
11 lb-in
9 – 51
9.1.11 Internal trip unit self-test on
the overcurrent tripping function
For commissioning and function testing.
Conditions
- Trip unit is activated by:
operating current
external 24 V DC voltage supply
- Current not in overload range
Indicators (page 9-10)
Internal circuit breaker self-test without tripping
Normal operation of the circuit breaker is not impaired
1
2Running light
All indicators will light up one after other (from left to right or from top to bottom)
3The flashing time corresponds to the long-time delay tRThe flashing time deviates more than 10% from the set long-time
delay tR
4
The L-tripping indicator lights up
Te s t OK
T.U. ERROR indicator lights up
Te s t not OK
Te s t not OK
Trip unit is defective, even if the L-tripping indicator lights up
5
- LED goes out after 30 sec.
- End of internal self-test
- Premature ending of test by
pressing CLEAR
6Trip unit OK Testing with handheld test device Handheld test device (page 9-97)
The test can be canceled
at any time by pressing CLEAR
9 – 52
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
Internal circuit breaker self-test with tripping
1
2Running light
All indicators will light up one after other (from left to right or from top to bottom)
3The flashing time corresponds to the long-time delay tRThe flashing time deviates more than 10% from the set long-time
delay tR
4Circuit breaker trips
Te s t OK
Circuit breaker does not trip
Te s t not OK
Tes t not OK
Trip unit is defective, even if the circuit breaker trips
5
q Reclosing a circuit breaker trip-
ped by the trip unit (page 6-9)
Test with handheld test device
- Check wiring between trip unit and tripping solenoid
- Test tripping solenoid
The test can be canceled
at any time by pressing CLEAR
12 3
0075-01-02
Press and hold CLEAR Press and hold TEST Release both buttons at the same time
9 – 53
9.1.12 Sealing and locking device
NOTE
Keep sealing wire as short as possible.
Catalog No.
ETU745 - ETU748 WLTUSC55
ETU776 WLTUSC76
2
1
lock
seal
12
remove
9 – 54
9.2 CubicleBUS Modules
9.2.1 System architecture
-AO: Analog output module
-BDA: Breaker Data Adapter; adapter for parameterizing, operating and monitoring the circuit breaker via any input/output unit with
browser features; connection via test socket of trip unit or RJ45 to the last external cmodule
-BSS: Breaker Status Sensor for acquisition of signals about the circuit breaker status (always combined with COM15/16 module)
-c: Internal bus system for interconnection of circuit breaker components and for connection of external c
modules
-COM15/16: Communications module for interconnection of cand PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS (always combined with
Breaker Status Sensor / BSS)
-DI: Digital input modules for potential-free input signals - "0/1"-signals; a maximum of two modules with different configurations
can be connected
-DO: Digital output modules with 6 outputs each; a maximum of three modules with different configurations or versions can be
connected
-ETU: Electronic trip unit
-Metering: Measurement function or measurement function PLUS
-PROFIBUS-DP/MODBUS: Field bus for connection of automation components
-Protection: Protection module
-VT: Voltage transformer
-ZSI: Module for zone selective interlocking, must always be connected as the first module
NOTE
The basic functions of the electronic trip units do not require an auxiliary power supply.
To use extended functions of the trip units requiring data exchange via the c, an external 24 V DC voltage supply
must be connected. (page 9-92)
X6
Close/Open
9 – 55
9.2.2 Internal modules
9.2.2.1 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
For collecting circuit breaker status information via signaling switches and transmitting these data to the c.
Signaling switches for BSS
(1) Spring charge signaling switch
(2) Signaling switch OPEN / CLOSE position S44
(3) Ready-to-close signaling switch
(4) S45 Bell Alarm signaling switch
(5) Signaling switch for connected position S46
(6) Signaling switch for test position S47
(7) Signaling switch for disconnected position S48
(8) Signaling switch S43 UVR or 2nd shunt trip
0206-3
Trip Unit
UVR or 2nd shunt trip
Springs
c
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
(8)
9 – 56
Installing the BSS module
Always discharge the closing spring before removing any covers or the front panel of the circuit breaker (page 23-2).
Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3) and Removing front panel (page 23-4).
Replace the trip unit (page 9-49).
(1) BSS
(2) Actuating shaft
(3) BSS
(4) Ready-to-close indicator
(5) Drive shaft
(6) Carrier
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
4
3
1
2
9 – 57
Attaching signaling switch S43 to the 2nd shunt trip / UVR
(1) See-saw
(2) Signaling switch
(3) Guide
(4) Groove
Attaching signaling switch S45 to the ETU carriage
(1) black wiring
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
UVR / 2nd shunt trip: signaling switch S 43
(1) S45
9 – 58
Connecting BSS module
The first cconnection leads to the secondary disconnect block X8. The second cconnection is made according to the
circuit breaker equipment.
Circuit diagrams (page 8-1)
(1) ETU745 - 776 without metering function
(2) ETU745 - 776 with metering function
(3) X51-X52 External conducted cubicle bus link does only exist in release 1. release 2 uses an internal link
9.2.2.2 COM15 module
Interface adapter for:
- converting csignals to PROFIBUS-DP signals and vice-versa
- for draw-out circuit breakers:
detecting the circuit breaker position in the cradle with auxiliary signaling switches S46, S47 and S48, and emitting the corre-
sponding signals to the cand the PROFIBUS-DP.
- providing special functions via additional inputs and outputs (e.g. to control the circuit breaker and for parameterization)
9 – 59
Overview
(1) Connection terminals for additional inputs and outputs to provide special functions
(2) SUB-D plug, 9-pole, for PROFIBUS-DP connection
(3) cLED
(4) PROFIBUS-DP LED
(5) Connecting cables to hand plug X8
(6) c connection for connecting external cmodules or for the terminating resistor
Indications
LED Indication Significance
PROFIBUS-DP
off No voltage at COM15
green PROFIBUS-DP communication
red no PROFIBUS-DP communication with master class 1 activ
c
off No cmodules found
green ccommunication with master class 1 activ
green flashing no connection to ETU or metering function
red cfault
9 – 60
Fitting COM15 module on the cradle
-OPEN circuit breaker (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle q (page 23-3)
S46, S47 and S48:
Signaling switches for detecting the circuit breaker position in the cradle and transfer to PROFIBUS-DP and c
(page 8-1)
Attaching the position indicating module to the withdrawable circuit breaker
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
COM15 module
S46
S47S48
1
2
X7
v2
2 x M4x8
1
2
3
4
PZ 3
9 – 61
Connecting wires
Circuit diagrams (page 8-1)
(1) Hand plug X8
(2) Connecting cable to first external CublicleBUS module or terminating resistor
(3) Connecting cable to hand plug X8
Connections for additional inputs and outputs
Designation Assignment Terminal
X8-1 c - X8.1
X8-2 c + X8.2
X8-3 24 V DC + X8.3
X8-4 24 V DC GND X8.4
NOTE
If no external cmodules are connected to the COM15 module, the terminating resistor has to be plugged into the
cterminal.
Absence of the terminating resistor can cause errors and potentially loss of communications.
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
0,5 Nm
4 lb-in
9 – 62
9.2.2.3 COM16 module
Interface adapter for:
- converting csignals to MODBUS signals and vice-versa
- for draw-out circuit breakers:
detecting the circuit breaker position in the cradle with the signaling switches S46, S47 and S48, and emitting corresponding
signals on the cand the MODBUS.
- providing special functions via additional inputs and outputs (e.g. to control the circuit breaker and for parameterization)
Overview
(1) Connection terminals for additional inputs and outputs to provide special functions
(2) SUB-D plug, 9-pole, for MODBUS connection
(3) cLED
(4) MODBUS LED
(5) Connecting cables to hand plug X8
(6) cconnection for connecting external cmodules or for the terminating resistor
Indicators
- For installation and connection of the COM15 module, please refer to installation and connection of the COM15 module
(page 9-58)
LED Indication Significance
MODBUS
off No voltage at COM16
green MODBUS communication operating
red no MODBUS communication (timeout)
c
off No cmodules found
green ccommunication operating
green flashing cparticipant found, but no connection to ETU or metering function
red cfault
9 – 63
MODBUS interface
The COM16 module is equipped with a 2-wire RS485 interface. The MODBUS connector is a 9-pin female Sub-D connector with the
following pinout:
The cable shielding must be connected to the circuit breaker's protective grounding to prevent EMF disturbances being channeled into the
module.
Write Enable input
The COM16 Module is equipped with an input that must be activated to allow the module to accept remote control commands as well as
remote parameterization. When this input is not active, the module will reject all incoming packets that would normally change the state of
an output (open/close circuit breaker) or change protective parameters. Normal polling and communication of data are not affected.
The following commands are blocked if the Write Enable input is inactive:
- opening/closing circuit breaker
- resetting after a trip
- Changing any protective function parameters and extended protective function parameters
- changing any communications parameter (e.g. address)
- changing any parameter of the metering function (e.g. demand period length)
- resetting any diagnostic or service-related counter or indicator
- setting/resetting outputs of the digital output modules
The following commands are always allowed, independent of the state of the Write Enable input:
- changing and setting the trigger settings of the waveform capture function
- reading the contents of the waveform buffer
- changing alarm and setpoint function settings
- changing any of the customer-changeable text strings
- resetting the min/max log
- setting/resetting the "Free Output" of the COM16 module
- setting system time
Pin
1COMMON
5Transceiver Terminal 1, V1 voltage
9Transceiver Terminal 0, V0 voltage
2-4, 6-8 Not connected
9 – 64
MODBUS Functionality
Transmission Protocol
The COM16 module operates in the RTU transmission mode. ASCII transmission mode is not supported.
Overview of supported Functions
The COM16 module provides the following MODBUS function codes for accessing the data contained in the WL circuit breaker.
FC Name Description
02: Read Discrete Inputs Reads the state of the Bits in the Status Register
01: Read Coils Reads the state of multiple Control Bits and Extra Flags
05: Write Single Coil Sets the state of a single Control Bit or Extra Flag
15: Write Multiple Coils Sets the state of multiple Control Bits and Extra Flags
04: Read Input Registers Reads the Basic Data Registers. Three Basic Types (1, 2 and 3) are supported.
03: Read Holding Registers Reads a complete data set.
16: Write Multiple Registers Writes a complete data set.
07: Read Exception Status Reads the state of eight Exception Status bits
08: Diagnostics Function provides a method for checking the communication between the master
and the slave
11: Get Comm Event Counter Returns a status word and an event count from the communications event counter
12: Get Comm Event Log Returns a status word, event count, message count, and a field of event bytes
9 – 65
MODBUS Communication settings
For MODBUS communication, the following settings must be made in the COM16 module: baud rate, serial transmission configuration,
MODBUS address.
MODBUS Slave Address
The MODBUS communication address range of the COM16 module is 1 through 126.
MODBUS address 0 is used as a broadcast address in MODBUS systems.
MODBUS address 0xF1(hex) is defined as a broadcast address for COM16 modules.
The MODBUS slave address is assigned to data point 5 and may be changed by writing a new address value to high-byte of register 40962
(0xA002). If the COM16 module receives an invalid slave address value, the invalid value will be ignored.
Baud Rate
Baud rate settings of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 are supported. 19200 baud is the default setting. The baud rate is assigned to data
point 427 and may be changed by writing a new baud rate value to high-byte of register 40984 (0xA022). The following numbers are used to
identify the selected baud rate. If the COM16 module receives an invalid baud rate, the invalid baud rate will be ignored.
Parity
Parity settings of "No Parity", "Odd Parity" and "Even Parity" are supported. "Even Parity" is the default setting. The parity is assigned to data
point 428 and may be changed by writing a new parity value to the low-byte of register 40994 (0xA022). The following numbers are used to
identify the selected parity. If the COM16 module receives an invalid parity, the invalid parity will be ignored.
Auto configuration of baud rate and parity
The factory settings for baud rate and parity are 19200 baud and "Even Parity". These settings may be changed either by writing from the
master to data points 427 and 428 in register 40994 (0xA022) or via the auto configuration process. The auto configuration process only
occurs when the supply voltage is switched on.
When the supply voltage is switched on, the COM16 module monitors the bus activity. If the COM16 module detects bus activity but cannot
receive any valid data, the auto configuration process is started. The module cycles through all combinations of baud rate and parity until it
finds the combination which allows it to receive valid data. This combination is then saved and the auto configuration process ended.
If the COM16 module does not find a combination that allows it to receive valid data after cycling through all combinations, it will adopt the
original settings for baud rate and parity, and the auto configuration process will be ended.
The time required to complete the auto configuration process can be several seconds depending on:
- Baud rate
- How often the master transmits a telegram
- The length of the messages transmitted by the master
- The number of tests required to detect a valid baud rate/parity combination
Number Baud rate
01200
12400
24800
39600
419200
Number Parity
0No Parity
1Odd Parity
2Even Parity
9 – 66
Changing the communication parameters
The communication parameters of the COM16 module can be changed by writing the required parameters (baud rate, serial configuration
and MODBUS communication address) in data set 160.
Register
Dataset 160 – communication parameters
Address: A000 hex, Registers: 39, Access: Read / Write
Address High/
Low
dec hex Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL1
Source
VL2Format Length
(Bit) Scaling
40961 0xA001 -Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 -COM16 COM11 COM21 -32 -
40963 0xA003 LOW Reserved - - - - - 8 -
40963 0xA003 HIGH MODBUS address 5COM16 COM11 COM21 unsign
ed char 8 0
40964 0xA004 LOW Basic type of MODBUS data
transfer 6COM16 COM11 COM21 Hex 2 -
40964 0xA004 HIGH Reserved - - - - - 8 -
40965 0xA005 -Data in the cyclic profile of
MODBUS 7COM16 COM11 COM21 Format
(7) 224 -
40979 0xA013 -Reserved - - - - - 48 -
40982 0xA016 -IP address of the BDA/BDA
PLUS 10 BDA - - Format
(10) 40 -
40985 0xA019 LOW MODBUS transmission rate
(baud rate) 427 COM16 COM11 COM21 Format
(427) 8 -
40985 0xA019 HIGH Parity 428 COM16 COM11 COM21 Format
(428) 8 -
40986 0xA01A -Reserved - - - - - 144 -
40995 0xA023 LOW Property byte (parity) 428 COM16 COM11 COM21 PB 8 -
40995 0xA023 HIGH
Property byte (MODBUS
transmission rate (baud
rate))
427 COM16 COM11 COM21 PB 8 -
40996 0xA024 LOW Reserved - - - - PB 8 -
40996 0xA024 HIGH Property byte (MODBUS
address) 5COM16 COM11 COM21 PB 8 -
40997 0xA025 LOW Property byte (basic type of
MODBUS data transfer) 6COM16 COM11 COM21 PB 8 -
40997 0xA025 HIGH Reserved - - - - PB 8 -
40998 0xA026 LOW Property byte (data in the
cyclic profile of MODBUS) 7COM16 COM11 COM21 PB 8 -
40998 0xA026 HIGH Reserved - - - - PB 8 -
40999 0xA027 LOW Property byte (IP address of
the BDA/BDA PLUS)-BDA - - PB 8 -
9 – 67
MODBUS function codes
In addition to the MODBUS function codes of the COM16 module, described on page 9-63, the following definitions of the Status Register,
Control Bits, Extra Flags, Basic Types and Exception Status Bits apply to the COM16 module.
Status Register
The Status Register provides WL status information to the MODBUS master. The Status Register is accessed using the following functions:
- 02 Read Input Status Discretes
- 04 Read Input Registers
Bit number WL
0, 1
Circuit breaker position
00 = disconnected position
01 = connected position
10 = test position
11 = circuit breaker not present
2, 3
Circuit breaker status
00 = not ready
01 = circuit breaker open
10 = circuit breaker closed
11 = circuit breaker tripped
4Circuit Breaker is ready to close
5Undervoltage release
6Closing spring charged
7Overload warning
8Setpoints active
9Warning(s) active
10 MODBUS "Write enable" input active
11 User input
12, 13, 14
Tr i p
000 = no trip
001 = overload trip
010 = instantaneous short-circuit trip
011 = short time delayed short-circuit trip
100 = ground-fault trip
101 = trip caused by extended protective function
110 = N conductor trip
15 Load shedding
9 – 68
Control Bits and Extra Flags
Control Bits and Extra Flags make it possible for the MODBUS master to control various WL functions.
The Control Bits and Extra Flags are accessed using the following functions:
- 01 Read Coils
- 05 Write Single Coil
- 15 Write Multiple Coils
Bit number WL
Control Bits 0, 1
Breaker open / close
00 = no action
01 = open circuit breaker
10 = close circuit breaker
11 = no action
2clear reason for trip
3Not used
4
User output
0 = User output Off
1 = User output On
5Not used
6Not used
7Not used
Extra Flags 8, 9 not used
10 Clear log book
11 Clear all min/max values
12 Clear temperature
min/max values
13 Not used
14 Clear maintainance counters
15 Synchronize system clock at a rising edge
Sets the time to xx:30:00:00
9 – 69
Basic Data Types
Basic data types 1, 2 and 3 are supported. Basic data type 1 is the default setting. Basic data type 1 consists of 7 registers,
basic data type 2 consists of 13 registers and Basic data type 3 consists of 22 registers.
Basic data is accessed using the function:
04 Read Input Registers - Reads the Basic Data including the Status Register
Basic Data Type 1 Registers and Default Data Points
Register Byte Name Default Data Point – WL
10, 1 Status Register WL status bits
22, 3 Data Block 1 Phase L1 current
34, 5 Data Block 2 Phase L2 current
46, 7 Data Block 3 Phase L3 current
58, 9 Data Block 4 Current in phase under highest load
6 LOW 10 Block 1 property byte Property byte of phase L1 current
6 HIGH 11 Block 2 property byte Property byte of phase L2 current
7 LOW 12 Block 3 property byte Property byte of phase L3 current
7 HIGH 13 Block 4 property byte Property byte of max current in phase under highest load
9 – 70
Basic Data Type 2 Registers and Default Data Points
Register Byte Name Default Data Point – WL
10, 1 Status Register WL status bits
22, 3 Data Block 1 Phase L1 current
34, 5 Data Block 2 Phase L2 current
46, 7 Data Block 3 Phase L3 current
58, 9 Data Block 4 Current in phase under highest load
610, 11 Data Block 5 Current in neutral conductor
712, 13 Data Block 6 Average phase-to-phase voltage
814, 15 Data Block 7 Average power factors of 3 phases
916, 17 Data Block 8 Total active energy of 3 phasesa)
a) Only 2 bytes of the 4 byte data point will be communicated (range: 0 - 65535 MWh)
10 LOW 18 Block 1 property byte Property byte of phase L1 current
10 HIGH 19 Block 2 property byte Property byte of phase L2 current
11 LOW 20 Block 3 property byte Property byte of phase L3 current
11 HIGH 21 Block 4 property byte Property byte of current in phase under highest load
12 LOW 22 Block 5 property byte Property byte of current in neutral conductor
12 HIGH 23 Block 6 property byte Property byte of average phase-to-phase voltage
13 LOW 24 Block 7 property byte Property byte of average power factors of 3 phases
13 HIGH 25 Block 8 property byte Property byte of total active energy of 3 phases
9 – 71
Basic Data Type 3 Registers and Default Data Points
a) Only 2 bytes of the 4 byte data point will be communicated (range: 0 - 65535 MWh)
Register Byte Name Default Data Point – WL
10, 1 Status Register WL status bits
22, 3 Data Block 1 Phase L1 current
34, 5 Data Block 2 Phase L2 current
46, 7 Data Block 3 Phase L3 current
58, 9 Data Block 4 Current in phase under highest load
610, 11 Data Block 5 Current in neutral conductor
712, 13 Data Block 6 Phase-to-phase voltage L1 to L2
814, 15 Data Block 7 Phase-to-phase voltage L2 to L3
916, 17 Data Block 8 Phase-to-phase voltage L3 to L1
10 18, 19 Data Block 9 Phase-to-neutral voltage L1
11 20, 21 Data Block 10 Phase-to-neutral voltage L2
12 22, 23 Data Block 11 Phase-to-neutral voltage L3
13 24, 25 Data Block 12 Average power factor of 3 phases a)
14 26, 27 Data Block 13 Total active energy of 3 phases*
15 28, 29 Data Block 14 Total apparent power of 3 phases
16 30 Block 1 property byte Property byte of phase L1 current
31 Block 2 property byte Property byte of phase L2 current
17 32 Block 3 property byte Property byte of phase L3 current
33 Block 4 property byte Property byte of current in phase under highest load
18 34 Block 5 property byte Property byte of current in neutral conductor
35 Block 6 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L1 to L2
19 36 Block 7 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L2 to L3
37 Block 8 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L3 to L1
20 38 Block 9 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L1
39 Block 10 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L2
21 40 Block 11 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L3
41 Block 12 property byte Property byte of average power factors of 3 phases
22 42 Block 13 property byte Property byte of total active energy of 3 phasesa)
43 Block 14 property byte Property byte of total apparent power of 3 phases
9 – 72
Exception Status Bits
The Exception Status Bits are accessed using the following functions:
07 Read Exception Status - Reads the state of the Exception Status Bits
Further information about the application of these inputs and outputs is given in the "WL MODBUS Communication Manual" WL
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker catalog.
Catalog number
9.2.2.4 Metering function PLUS
Trip units ETU745 - ETU776 can be equipped with a metering function PLUS. This, however, requires external voltage transformers
providing a three-phase metering voltage.
In addition to the values for the currents, the metering function PLUS provides data on voltages, powers, energy values, power factors and
frequency via the cfor further processing.
Bit Description
0Excessive breaker contact wear
1Communication with trip unit OK
2COM16 is OK
3 - 7 Reserved
Catalog No.
WL Breaker Configuration Software POWERCONFIG
NOTICE
High voltages may damage the MeteringPLUS module.
The secondary voltage of the external voltage transformers must not exceed 150 V AC RMS or 300 V AC peak value.
9 – 73
These data can be shown on the display of the trip units, transmitted to the PROFIBUS-DP via the COM15 module or to the MODBUS via
the COM16 module and transferred to the outputs of external cmodules. Based on these data, conclusions can be drawn about
the condition of the power system.
Measured parameter Range Accuracy1)
Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
Earth-fault current Ig
(measurement with external earth-fault transformer)
100 - 1200 ± 5 % of measurement range
Line-to-line voltages UL12, UL23, UL31 15 - 130 V
130 - 1150 V
± 5 % of read value
± 1 % of measurement range
Line-to-N-line voltages UL1N, UL2N, UL3N 10 - 75 V
75 - 700 V
± 5 % of read value
± 1 % of measurement range
Present average of line-to-line voltages UavgD 15 - 130 V
130 - 1150 V
± 5 % of read value
± 1 % of measurement range
Present average of Line-to-N-line voltages UavgY 10 - 75 V
75 - 700 V
± 5 % of read value
± 1 % of measurement range
Apparent power SL1, SL2, SL3 13 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
± 2 % vom Messbereich
Total apparent power 13 - 24000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
Active power PL1, PL2, PL3 -8000 - +8000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P. F. > 0.6)
Total active power -24000 - +24000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P. F. > 0,6)
Reactive power QL1, QL2, QL3 -6400 - +6400 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Total reactive power -20000 - +20000 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Power factors cosL1, cos L2, cos L3,-0,6 - 1 - +0.6
-0.6 - 1 - +0,6
± 0.04
± 0,04
Power factor total -0.6 - 1 - +0.6
-0,6 - 1 - +0,6
± 0.04
± 0,04
Long term average of currents IL1, IL2, IL3 30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
Long term average of 3-phase current 30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
Long term average of active power in L1, L2, L313 - 8000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P. F. > 0.6)
Long term average of active power 3-phase 13 - 8000 kW ± 2 % of measurement range
Long term average of apparent power in L1, L2, L313 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
Long term average of apparent power 3-phase 13 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
Long term average of reactive power 3-phase -8000 - +8000 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Energy consumed 1 - 10000 MWh ± 2 %
Energy delivered 1 - 10000 MWh ± 2 %
Reactive energy consumed 1 - 10000 MVarh ± 2 %
Reactive energy delivered 1 - 10000 MVarh ± 2 %
Frequency 15 - 40 Hz
40 - 70 Hz
70 - 440 Hz
± 0.1 Hz
± 0,1 Hz
Distortion factor of current and voltage 2 - 100 % ± 2 % of measurement range up to 29th harmonic
Phase unbalance of current and voltage2) 2 - 150 % ± 1 % of displayed value
1) The given measured value tolerances are valid for one year based on an average operating temperature of 25 °C. After this period, deviations may occur.
The given tolerances for measured values for which the measured voltage is consumed when being determined are only valid if the voltage measurement
is carried out with an accuracy of 0.5 %.
2) ANSI definition: Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
9 – 74
Extended metering functions
The metering function PLUS is used to implement extended protective functions beyond the functionality of the trip units.
1) ANSI definition:
Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
If one of these parameters exceeds or falls below its default settings, the trip unit is tripped after the adjusted delay via the c.
The parameters can be adjusted via:
- the test socket with the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP
-the MODBUS
- the graphical display (ETU776)
Parameter Range Delay
Undervoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 15 sec.
Overvoltage 200 - 1200 V 0 - 15 sec.
Active power in normal direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 15 sec.
Active power in reverse direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 15 sec.
Overfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 15 sec.
Underfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 15 sec.
Phase current unbalance 1) 5 - 50% 0 - 15 sec.
Phase voltage unbalance 1) 5 - 50% 0 - 15 sec.
Phase rotation
Pickup THD current 3 - 50% 5 - 15 sec.
Pickup THD voltage 3 - 50% 5 - 15 sec.
9 – 75
Setpoints
The setpoint function can be used to signal or record special events in the power system.
1) ANSI definition:
Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
If one of these parameters exceeds or falls below its default settings, the trip unit is tripped after the adjusted delay via the c.
The parameters can be adjusted via:
- the test socket with the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP
- the MODBUS
- the graphical display (ETU776).
Parameter Range Delay
Phase overcurrent 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.
Ground overcurrent 30 - 12000 A 0 - 255 sec.
Neutral overcurrent 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.
phase current unbalance* 5 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
current demand 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.
undervoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 255 sec.
phase voltage unbalance* 5 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
overvoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 255 sec.
overpower in normal direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.
KW reverse 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.
KW demand 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.
KVA demand 1 - 12000 kVA 0 - 255 sec.
KVAR demand 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.
KVAR consumed 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.
KVAR delivered 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.
KVA 1 - 12000 kVA 0 - 255 sec.
overfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 255 sec.
underfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 255 sec.
underpower factor (PF) -0.001 - 0.001 0 - 255 sec.
overpower factor (PF) -0.001 - 0.001 0 - 255 sec.
current THD 3 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
voltage THD 3 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
crest factor 1 - 2.55 0 - 255 sec.
form factor 1 - 2.55 0 - 255 sec.
9 – 76
Additional functions
The metering function Plus offers two additional functions:
- two independent waveform buffers
- harmonic analysis
The two independent waveform buffers can be used to analyze the current and voltage values at the time of the event.
If the waveform buffers are programmed to "recording" (standard setting), continuous recording takes place until a previously defined event
occurs. Then, the recording is stopped, and the current or voltage waveforms at the time of the event can be observed on a visual display
(graphical LCD, laptop or PC). The time window is one second; the resolution is 1649 values/second.
The waveform buffers can also be started or stopped individually via the communication channels (PROFIBUS-DP, MODBUS,
c).
The waveform buffers can be parameterized via:
- the test socket with the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP
-the MODBUS
- the graphical display (ETU776)
Settings for waveform buffers
Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, ILN, Ig
Voltages UL1, UL2, UL3
9 – 77
9.2.2.5 Connecting the voltage transformer
The metering module ("MeterPLUS Function") can be set to expect 3W or 4W (LL/LG) connections and will adjust the amplitude and phase
of the signal as necessary.
The parameters on the trip unit must be set as follows:
(1) VT Primary voltage (240 V/480 V/600 V)
(2) VT Secondary voltage
(100 V/110 V/120 V)
(3) VT Connection
(Wye / LG, Delta / LL)
Three VTs must be used at all times.
All three VTs must be rated for the rated LL voltage (e.g. 480 V) and can have either 100 V / 110 V or 120 V secondary rated voltage.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Note: Required primary and secondary overcurrent protection (fusing) not shown for clarity.
to X8.8
to X8.7
to X8.6
to X8.5L1
L2
L3
LN
120V/ 3
primary bus
configuration
VT primary
connection
VT primary
connection
3:4W System: Wye (L-N, L-G) Connection
Secondary
to X8.8
to X8.7
to X8.6
to X8.5
L1
L2
L3
V
1-2
120V
V
2-3
V
3-1
Primary
V
L-L
(V
L-L
)/ 3
(V
L-L
)/ 3
V
L-L
3:3W System: Delta (L-L) Connection
SecondaryPrimary
(assuming 480V LL)
(277V)
(69V)
(assuming 480V LL)
(480V)
208V
V
L-L
(480V) 120V
Metering VT Settings:
Delta/Wye : Delta
VT Primary: 480 (for instance)
VT Secondary: 120 (for instance)
Metering VT Settings:
Delta/Wye : Wye
VT Primary: 480 (for instance)
VT Secondary: 120 (for instance)
primary bus
configuration
69V
9 – 78
9.2.3 External CublicleBUS modules
9.2.3.1 General
Application
External cmodules are used for communication between the WL circuit breaker and the secondary equipment in the circuit
breaker panel. They are provided to control analog indications, transmit the circuit breaker tripping status and the reason for tripping
and to read additional control signals. Furthermore, with one of these modules it is possible to implement a zone selective interlocking for
short-circuit protection.
(1) Indicator LED
(2) Rotary coding switch
(3) Connection X3: c
(4) Connection X5: inputs or outputs
(5) Connection X4: inputs or outputs
(6) Connection X2: c
(7) Connection X1: c
(8) "TEST" button
Installation
The external cmodules are snapped onto a standard 35-mm DIN rail inside the switchgear panel. It must be ensured that the
length of the connecting cable of the first module to the circuit breaker does not exceed 6.5 ft.
Connection setup
The cmodules must only be connected to each other and to the circuit breaker using the pre-assembled cables supplied.
These cables are also used for the 24 V DC voltage supply of the cmodules.
If more than two cmodules are connected, the 24 V DC voltage supply must be fed via a separate cable from module to module.
Only one cmodule can be connected directly to a circuit breaker. Further modules must be connected from module to module.
Radial cables are not permissible.
If provided, the ZSI module is always the first module, and must be connected directly to the circuit breaker.
The ccable must be connected to the X3 connection of the last module with a 120 0.5 W resistor.
The total length of the ccables must not exceed 30 ft from auxiliary current plug X8 of the circuit breaker to the last
cmodule.
9 – 79
Circuit breaker without COM15/16 module
(1) Connecting cable to 1st module (4-core, cores X8-4/X3-1 twisted with X8-3/X3-4 and X8-1/X3-2 twisted with X8-2/X3-3)
(2) Connecting cables between modules
(3) cmodules
(4) Terminating resistor 120 0.5 W
(5) Cable connection for 24 V DC voltage supply
9 – 80
Circuit breaker with COM15/16 module
(1) Only if there are more than 2 cmodules:
Connecting cables between the X8 and the first cmodule for 24 V DC voltage supply
(2) Connecting cables between cmodules
(3) cmodules
(4) Terminating resistor 120 0.5 W
(5) Connecting cables between the modules for 24 V DC voltage supply
(6) Connecting cable between COM15/16 and the first cmodule (with two RJ45 plugs)
(7) COM15 / COM16
9 – 81
Setting principle
Indicators
Module test
The correct operation of the cmodules can be verified in the test mode. The test mode is started by pushing the "TEST" button
once. All outputs and the associated LEDs are switched off. The color of the DEVICE LED changes from green to yellow.
Testing inputs and outputs
Pushing the "TEST" button several times in quick succession when an LED is on switches the respective input/output on and off alternately.
LED Indication Significance
DEVICE
green Module in operation
yellow Module in test mode
red Module faulty
c
green Connection to cavailable
off No connection to c
All other LEDs
yellow Option set or signal available
off Option not set or no signal available
NOTICE
Unintended operation of the circuit breaker and other devices.
The test circuits of this unit emit real output signals that may cause operation of the circuit breaker and other devices that
may be connected to the associated cmodule.
During the test, the circuit breaker and downstream devices shoud be isolated to prevent unintended device operations.
Pressing the "TEST" Button Reaction
Twice quickly - LED 1 on
- Input/output 1 on
After a pause,
twice quickly
- LED 1 and input/output 1 off, LED 2 on
- Input/output 2 on
After a pause,
twice quickly
- LED 2 and input/output 2 off, LED 3 on
- Input/output 3 on
... ...
After a pause,
twice quickly
- LED 5 and input/output 5 off, LED 6 on
- Input/output 6 on
After a pause, once Input/output 6 off, all LEDs on
Once Test mode starts again, all inputs/outputs and the associated LEDs are off
The value 0.1 is set if the
rotary coding switch is positioned
3 x 0.5
1/8“
in this segment
9 – 82
Testing LEDs only
Pushing the "Test" button several times with pauses in between switches the LEDs on successively. After the last LED, all LEDs are
switched on.
Repeated pushing the "TEST" button starts the test mode again, and all LEDs, inputs and outputs are switched off.
Quitting the test mode
Do not press the "TEST" button for approximately 30 sec.
If all LEDs are on, the test mode will already be quitted after about 4 sec.
9.2.3.2 ZSI module
Function
When circuit breakers are combined with ZSI modules, a short-circuit occurring in systems with several grading levels can be precisely
localized.
For this purpose, all circuit breakers are interconnected via their ZSI modules.
When a short-circuit or ground-fault occurs, each circuit breaker affected by the short-circuit current queries its downstream circuit breaker
to determine whether the short-circuit is present in the next downstream device. Only the circuit breaker nearest the short-circuit, in the
upstream direction, is tripped. If "S" or "S+G" is selected on the ZSI module and the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal -
ZSI-IN - from its downstream circuit breaker, in the event of short-circuit, the delay time setting for the short-circuit trip is set to 50 ms. If a
short-circuit is detected, a blocking signal - ZSI-OUT - will be sent to the upstream circuit breakers. The trip takes place after 50 ms. It
typically delays between 80 and 90 ms.
If "S" or "S+G" is selected on the ZSI module and the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal - ZSI-IN - from its downstream circuit
breaker, in the event of ground-fault, the delay time setting for the ground-fault trip is set to 100 ms.
If a ground-fault is detected, a blocking signal - ZSI-OUT - will be sent to the upstream circuit breakers. The trip takes place after 100 ms.
It typically delays between 130 and 140 ms.
After a maximum delay time of 3 s, a given blocking signal ZSI-OUT is terminated.
Installation
(page 9-78)
Connection
Connection setup (page 9-78)
Only one ZSI module can be connected per circuit breaker.
If the ZSI module is used together with other cmodules, the ZSI module must be connected directly to the COM15 module or
hand plug X8.
9 – 83
Terminal assignment
Observe the specified polarity when connecting: plus to plus and minus to minus.
The maximum wire length of the ZSI wiring is 400 m for a wire diameter of AWG 18 (2-wire conductor).
For ZSI connections between only WL circuit breakers, wire lengths of up to 1000 m are permissible if the conductor diameter is increased
to AWG 13.
The ZSI connections must consist of twisted pair cables or shielded cables.
The ZSI module allows connection of up to:
- 8 circuit breakers at the ZSI IN input and
- 20 circuit breakers at the ZSI OUT output
Terminal Connection
TIE BRKR
Only for bus couplers;
Allows complete ZSI functionality in systems with buscouplers so that various energy flow directions can
be taken into account.
ZSI IN ZSI modules of lower-level circuit breakers
ZSI OUT ZSI modules of higher-level circuit breakers
MV OUT Signal to the medium-voltage level
9 – 84
Settings
Setting principle (page 9-81)
Indicators
(page 9-81)
Testing
(page 9-81)
In addition, a special test feature of the ZSI module (rotary coding switch in TEST position) makes it possible to check the ZSI wiring and the
operativeness of the ZSI electronics.
9.2.3.3 Digital input module
Function
With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals (DC 24 V) can be connected to the system.
These input signals are transferred to the PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS via the c, and can be evaluated accordingly.
For trip units ETU776, it is possible as an alternative to use an input signal of this type at input 1 to switch between two different sets of pro-
tection parameters (if provided).
Installation
(page 9-78)
Connection
Connection setup (page 9-78)
A maximum of two digital input modules can be operated on the c at the same time
- 1 module with the "BUS INPUT" setting
- 1 module with the "PARAMETER SWITCH" setting
Settings ZSI module
OFF ZSI function deactivated
SZSI module effective for short-time delayed short-circuits only
GZSI-module effective for ground-fault protection only
S+G ZSI-module effective for short-time delayed short-circuits and ground-fault
protection
TEST Test position for checking the ZSI functionality
9 – 85
Terminal assignment
Settings
Setting principle (page 9-81)
Indicators
(page 9-81)
Testing
(page 9-81)
Terminal assignment of digital input module
X4 Inputs 4-6
X5 Inputs 1-3
Settings of digital input module
BUS INPUT Inputs 1-6 are active.
If there is an input signal present, a corresponding message is transmitted
to the BUS via the COM15/16 module.
PARAMETER SWITCH Input 1 is used for parameter switchover. All other inputs have no function.
No input signal (LED 1 not lights up):
Parameter set A activated
Input signal available (LED 1 lights up):
Parameter set B activated
NOTE
The parameter switchover query can be overruled by a query via the BUS communication, the BDA or the graphical display.
BUS
Input
9 – 86
9.2.3.4 Digital output modules
Function
With digital output modules, up to 6 signals can be transmitted.
If the trip unit signals an event, the corresponding LED lights up after the adjusted delay time has elapsed, and the module sets a signal at
the corresponding output.
Digital output modules are available in the following versions:
- with rotary coding switch and relay outputs
- configurable and with relay outputs
Installation
(page 9-78)
Connection
Connection setup (page 9-78)
If a combination of digital output modules with rotary switch and configurable digital outputs is to be connected to a circuit breaker,
the following can be connected per circuit breaker:
- 1 digital output module with rotary coding switch and output assignment 1
- 1 digital output module with rotary coding switch and output assignment 2
- 1 configurable digital output module
9 – 87
Terminal assignment
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch
(1) Output assignment 1
(2) Delay time setting
(3) Output assignment 2
Configurable digital output modules
Terminal assignment of digital output module
X4 Outputs 4-6
X5 Outputs 1-3
(1) (2) (3)
9 – 88
Digital output modules with relay output provide changeover contacts at their outputs.
Settings
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch
Setting principle (page 9-81)
The delay time setting determines how long a signal of the trip unit must be present until the corresponding LED lights up and the signal is
set at the corresponding output.
Configurable digital output modules
Configurable digital output modules can be adjusted via:
- the test socket of the trip unit with the BDA
-the PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS.
Indicators
(page 9-81)
Testing
(page 9-81)
Current carrying capacity of the outputs
Relay output 250 V AC, 12 A
25 V DC, 12 A
Terminal assignment 1 (TRIP)
LSignaling contact overload tripping
SSignaling contact short-time delayed short-circuit
tripping
ISignaling contact instantaneous short-circuit tripping
GSignaling contact ground-fault tripping
G ALARM Signaling contact ground-fault alarm
NSignaling contact neutral conductor tripping
Delay time setting
TRIP 0 - 2 sec.
ALARM 0 - 2 sec.
Output assignment 2 (ALARM)
PRE TRIP Signaling contact leading signal overload tripping
(delay time 0 sec.)
TU ERR Signaling contact ETU error
LD SHED Signaling contact load shedding (delay time 0 sec.)
LD REST Signaling contact load restore (delay time 0 sec.)
TEMP Signaling contact temperature alarm
I UNBAL Signaling contact phase unbalance current
9 – 89
9.2.3.5 Analog output module
Function
With the analog output module, analog measured values can be transmitted, which can be shown on the cubicle door by means
of moving-coil instruments. A total of 4 outputs is available.
For the output signal, two different formats can be selected:
- 4 - 20 mA, output via terminal strip X5
- 0 - 10 V, output via terminal strip X4
Installation
(page 9-78)
Connection
Connection setup (page 9-78)
A maximum of 2 analog output modules can be connected; the rotary coding switches of these modules must, however, have different
settings.
Terminal assignment
Settings
Setting principle (page 9-81)
The measured values to be signaled are adjusted using the rotary switch. They are always present on the two terminal strips in the
corresponding format.
The following values are available at the outputs:
Output assignment
Position AO 1 AO 2 AO 3 AO 4
I IL1 IL2 IL3 IN
U UL12 UL23 UL31 UL1N
P PL1 PL2 PL3 Stotal
f f ULLavg Ptotal P. F. avg
P. F. P. F. L1 P. F. L2 P. F. L3 Phase unbalance current in%
9 – 90
Indicators
(page 9-81)
Testing
(page 9-81)
9.2.3.6 Catalog numbers
Each cmodule is supplied with a 0.2 m (7.8") connecting cable for the cconnection.
c module Catalog No.
ZSI module WLZSIMD
Analog output module WLANLGCUB
Digital output module with relay output WLRLYCUB
Digital output module with relay output, parameterizable WLRLYCCUB
Digital input module WLDGNCUB
ccable (1 m) WLCBUSCABLE1
ccable (2 m) WLCBUSCABLE2
ccable (0.2 m) WLCBUSCABLE02
ccable (4 m) WLCBUSCABLE4
ccable (9 m) WLCBUSCABLE9
9 – 91
9.2.4 External sensor for neutral conductor
(1) Version for copper bar on switchgear side
(2) Mounting bracket
(3) Screw M6 with washers and nut
(4) Version with copper connectors
(5) Connector P2
(6) Connector P1
Dimension drawings (page 7-18)
Terminal assignment
Remove bridge X8.9 - X8.10
This arrangement ensures the same direction of the current flow for the circuit breaker and the external neutral sensor.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Main conducting path
0377_nu
S1
P1
P2
S2 X8.10
X8.9
1
2
3
4
5
6
External N sensor
9 – 92
9.3 External voltage supply
The basic protective functions (L, S, I, & G) of the electronic trip units do not require an auxiliary power supply.
To use the extended functions of trip units ETU745 - 776 requiring data exchange via the c, an external 24 V DC (class 2) voltage
supply must be connected.
Connection
Version A: Connection to hand plug X8 (preferred version)
Version B: Connection to any cmodule
Requirements
The external voltage supply with 24 V DC must fulfill at least the requirements of UL class 2.
To supply power to a circuit breaker equipped with the maximum possible number of external cmodules, one of the Siemens
power supply units listed below can be used. If a second circuit breaker is to be supplied, a second power supply unit is also required.
The external power supply used for electronic components must not be used to supply the motor-operated mechanism.
When using voltage supply units from other manufacturers, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- Primary-switched-mode power supply unit
-24 V DC, ± 3 %
- Current rating: 2.5 A per circuit breaker maximum possible number of external cmodules or 3.8 A for two circuit
breakers with the maximum possible number of external cmodules.
Catalog number
Power supply Catalog No.
120/230 V AC / 24 V DC, 2.5 A WLSITOP25
120/230 V AC / 24 V DC, 3.8 A WLSITOP1
9 – 93
9.4 Breaker Data Adapter
9.4.1 Application
The Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) makes it possible to parameterize, operate and monitor the circuit breaker without additional software by
means of a browser-capable input/output device (e.g. a laptop). This is possible for circuit breakers equipped with trip units of the types
ETU745 - 776. On trip units ETU745 and ETU748, however, the basic protective functions cannot be parameterized. These are adjusted
solely by using the rotary coding switches.
Communication with the electronic system of the circuit breaker takes place via the c. For this purpose, the BDA can be option-
ally connected to the test socket of the trip unit, or - in case of longer stationary operation - to the last cmodule, and snapped onto
a 35-mm DIN rail. The required connection cables are supplied with the unit.
9.4.2 View
9.4.3 Indicators
9.4.4 Connection versions
The BDA can, depending on the application, be connected in different ways.
LED Indication Significance
DEVICE
green BDA in operation
yellow BDA in test mode
red BDA faulty
c
green cconnected available
red Check connections and cmodules
off No connection to c
NOTE
Connect the BDA to the trip unit prior to turning on the power supply.
9 – 94
Offline mode
All circuit breaker parameters can be entered and saved on a laptop, for example, without the need to communicate with the circuit breaker.
When the connection to the circuit breaker is established, these data can be transmitted and the circuit breaker can be parameterized auto-
matically.
(1) Browser-capable input/output device (e.g. laptop computer)
(2) BDA or BDA PLUS
(3) 24 V DC voltage supply (class 2)
(4) RS232 interface
9 – 95
Local operation
The circuit breaker is parameterized directly on site. The parameter settings can also be saved on the laptop computer and the diagnostic
data of the circuit breaker can be read.
(1) Browser-capable input/output unit (e.g. laptop computer)
(2) 24 V DC voltage supply if no voltage supply is provided via the c
(3) BDA or BDA PLUS
(4) Test socket of the trip unit (40-pole)
(5) Connection cable SUB-D, 15-pole (BDA) to SUB-D, 40-pole (test socket of trip unit)
(6) RS232 interface SUB-D, 9-pole
Remote access via modem
The circuit breaker data, including parameterization, can be accessed from any remote location.
(1) Browser-capable input/output device (e.g. laptop computer)
(2) Modem
(3) BDA PLUS
(4) External c-module
(5) Connection cable SUB-D, 15-pole (BDA) to RJ45 plug (c connection)
(6) RS232 interface SUB-D, 9-pole
9 – 96
Remote access via Ethernet
The circuit breaker data, including parameterization, are accessed via customer-side Ethernet. This connection type is only possible in the
BDA PLUS version.
(1) Browser-capable input/output device (e.g. laptop computer)
(2) Ethernet cable
(3) BDA PLUS
(4) External cmodule
(5) Connection cable SUB-D, 15-pole (BDA) to RJ45 plug (c connection)
(6) Ethernet connection
9.4.5 Voltage supply
The BDA requires a voltage supply of 24 V DC. This can be applied via:
- a separate, standard plug-type power supply unit or
-the CublicleBUS with the external voltage supply of the circuit breaker electronics.
9.4.6 Catalog numbers
Catalog No.
BDA PLUS WLBDAP
9 – 97
9.5 Handheld test device
The handheld test device is used to check that the trip unit, the energy and current transformers, the F5 tripping solenoid and the measured
value display are functioning properly.
9.5.1 View
(1) LED for operating voltage indication
(2) Control buttons
(3) 6 LEDs to show test results
9.5.2 Preparations
- Open and isolate the circuit breaker
- Document the trip unit setting values of the overload release
- Setting value IR = 1.0 In
- Interrupt external voltage supply for the electronic system, if present
- Remove the cap from test socket X25 of the trip unit
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
Cat. No.WLTS, Rev. 0.0 3WL9111-1AT31-0AA0
s
Test Device for WL Electronic Trip Units
TRIP TEST
POWER
CURRENT TRANSFORMER TEST
START
S
I
N
G
= O.K.
L1 L2 L3 NGETU
STATUS
Input 110 ... 125 VAC, 50/60 Hz
0556_nu
(1)
(2)
(3)
9 – 98
9.5.3 Connecting
(1) Test socket of the trip unit
(2) 40-pole ribbon cable with plugs
(3) Voltage supply
(4) Handheld test device
9.5.4 Voltage supply
The handheld test device is supplied by a 110 - 125 V AC network.
9.5.5 Operation
The status test begins after the voltage supply has been connected. The various components and parameters of the trip unit are queried. If
the status test has been completed successfully, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously.
If it has not been completed successfully, the "ETU STATUS" LED will flash. The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present.
The status test can be repeated any time by pressing the "START" button for at least three seconds.
It is also possible to test a trip unit that is already activated, i.e. one that is supplied by an external voltage source. However, it must be taken
into account that the "ETU STATUS" LED may briefly flash twice when the status test result is displayed, even if there have not been any
faults. As a precaution, the status test should be repeated without external voltage supply.
NOTE
Observe the connecting sequence.
Malfunctions and incorrect test results may result if the sequence is not observed.
Indicator Significance
1 x briefly, pause Handheld test device defective
2 x briefly, pause Trip unit defective
4 x briefly, pause
- Parameters not set correctly
- Current sensor not properly connected
- Wrong rating plug
- Missing rating plug
5 x briefly, pause - Tripping solenoid F5 not properly connected
- Solenoid defective
1
3
2
9 – 99
Testing the current and energy sensors
To test the current sensors and energy transducers, press the "START" button.
A lit-up LED confirms the proper operation of the corresponding sensor/converter. If an LED flashes, the corresponding
sensor/converter is not present, not properly connected is defective.
Testing the tripping function
To test the tripping function, press one of the buttons "L", "S", "I", "N" or "G".
Long-time delayed tripping Test
The long-time delayed short-circuit tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.
1Charge the circuit breaker
2Close the circuit breaker
3Press the [L] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set long-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of
flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Short-time delayed tripping Test
The short-time delayed short-circuit tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.
1Charge the circuit breaker
2Close the circuit breaker
3Press the [S] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set short-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of
flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Instantaneous tripping test
The instantaneous tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.
1Charge the circuit breaker
2Close the circuit breaker
3Press the [I] button
The circuit breaker will trip after approx. 2 seconds processing time. If the test device has completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS"
LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault
codes are listed on page 9-104).
START
IL S N G
L
S
I
9 – 100
Neutral conductor tripping test
The long-time delayed short-circuit tripping function for the neutral conductor and the trip unit circuitry for ETU types 727-776 can be tested
using the test device.The current sensor for the neutral conductor must be attached (page 9-91) and the "Neutral conductor protection" func-
tion must be switched on (page 9-14).
1Charge the circuit breaker
2Close the circuit breaker
3Press the [N] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set long-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of
flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Ground-fault tripping test
The ground-fault tripping function and the trip unit circuitry of ETU types 745-746 with an installed ground-fault protection module (with trip-
ping function WLGFM48 or WLGFM76) can be tested using the test device. The current sensor for the neutral conductor (page 9-91) and/or
the iron-core ground-fault sensor (page 9-45) must be attached.
1Charge the circuit breaker
2Close the circuit breaker
3Press the [G] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set ground-fault tripping delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test
device has completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash.
The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Testing the measured value display
This function works by inputting a signal into the trip unit. The signal is displayed as a single-phase current on the trip unit's display, and the
current's measured value is also transmitted via the communication interface to the connected CublicleBUS modules and the connected
MODBUS / PROFIBUS-DP networks.
This feature only works with an integrated display (WLETU745 with WLLCD748, WLETU748 with WLLCD748, WLETU776), and communi-
cates test signals when a communication interface and/or a CublicleBUS module is installed on the trip unit.This feature does not work when
a MeteringPLUS (WLMETERP) module is installed.
1Connect 24 V DC to power the trip unit.
2Press the [I] and [N] buttons simultaneously
A single-phase test signal is fed into the trip unit, which simulates a single-phase load current for the ETU. The local display, the connected
communications and connected CublicleBUS modules output this current value. The test signal will specify the simulated value to the first
phase for 30 seconds, before switching to the next phase. The cycle runs in the order L1, L2, L3, N, G. The test cycle is completed when all
phases have been tested.
Activation the trip unit
To activate the trip unit, press the "N" and "G" buttons simultaneously.
The trip unit will remain activated until another button on the handheld test device (WLTS) is depressed.
With this function, the "T.U.-Error"-LED can be checked if the status test had finished with the error "Trip unit defective".
N
G
I N
+
N G
+
9 – 101
9.5.6 Finishing
- Restore the documented settings
- Mount the cover on X25
9.5.7 Catalog numbers
Catalog No.
Handheld test device WLTS
Replacement cables WLTSC
10 – 1
10 Reset the reclosing lockout and the Bell Alarm
10.1 Resetting the Bell Alarm
1
Circuit breaker is tripped by trip unit
Automatic reset
2
Indicators
Circuit breaker is immediately ready to close again,
if closing spring is charged.
Signals
3
Reset Bell Alarm
Electrical remote reset
Option: Electrical remote reset of reclosing lockout and the
Bell Alarm via a remote reset solenoid. (page 10-5)
Manual reset
Press Bell Alarm (red pin), until it latches
4Bell Alarm Reset
Tripped signal reset
Automatic
reset of the maglatch
Tripping solenoid
0077-01_u
F5
Bell Alarm
Trip
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
0053-06_u
F7
S13
X8.13
X8.14
S24
X9.13
X9.14
X9.12
Bell Alarm
Reset
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
10 – 2
10.2 Resetting the Bell Alarm with reclosing lockout (optional)
WL circuit breakers are normally configured to be immediately ready to close again following a trip. With the automatic reset of the Bell
Alarm, the tripping solenoid is automatic resetting after the trip unit has tripped. The circuit breaker is immediately ready to close again. For
confirmation, the tripped indicator must be reset, either manually on the trip unit or via the remote reset solenoid.
When the WL breaker is configured with option WLNOAUTRSET, the tripping coil must be manually reset before the circuit breaker is
capable of closing. The following instruction details the resetting of the Bell Alarm, and the tripping coil.
1Circuit breaker is tripped by the trip unit
2
Indicators
Signals
3
Manual reset
Press Bell Alarm (red pin), until it latches
4
Bell Alarm reset
Tripping solenoid and Bell Alarm are reset.
5
Indicators
Circuit breaker is ready to close again if the closing spring is charged and no interlock is active.
Bell Alarm
Trip
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
Bell Alarm
F5
Tripping solenoid
0077-01_u
Reset
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
10 – 3
10.3 Field Installation of a reclosing lockout
To activate the Bell Alarm lockout, the automatic reset must be removed. The tripping solenoid, the tripped indicator and the tripped signal
must be reset manually at the breaker. Reclosing of the circuit breaker is blocked until the trip indicator has been reset.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2).
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3).
- Remove front panel (page 23-4).
- Remove the trip unit (page 9-49).
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
10 – 5
10.4 Installing the remote Bell Alarm reset
10.4.1 Mounting remote reset solenoid and cut-off switch
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2).
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3).
- Remove front panel (page 23-4).
- Remove the trip unit (page 9-49).
NOTICE
Can only be used with automatic reclosing lockout reset.
The remote reset solenoid will otherwise be overloaded and damaged.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
10 – 7
10.4.3 Function test
Then
- Install trip unit (page 9-49)
- Install front panel (page 23-4)
10.4.4 Updating the options label
1 2 3
NOTE
After installing additional electrical components, add the following data and mark with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
Voltage Catalog No.
Electric Bell Alarm reset solenoid
24 V DC WLRSET24
48 V DC WLRSET48
110 - 125 V AC / DC WLRSET120
208 - 250 V AC / DC WLRSET240
S24
0053-06_u
F7
S13
X8.13
X8.14
S24
X9.13
X9.14
X9.12
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
X9.12 X9.14
X9.13
S24
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA
Charging Motor
Remote Close Coil
X5-2 (+)
X5-1 (-)
X6-7 (+)
X6-8 (-)
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
1st Shunt Trip
UVR
2nd Shunt Trip
Remote Reset
X6-13 (-)
X6-14 (+)
X5-11 (-)
X5-12 (+)
X9-1 (-)
X9-2 (+)
X8-13 (-)
X8-14 (+)
Ready to Close Switch
X6-5
X6-6
240 VAC
4A
240 VAC
1st Shunt Trip Switch
X9-7
X9-8
240 VAC
240 VAC
UVR Switch
Open Fuse Switch
X9-10
X9-11
X9-5
X9-6
52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b
X6-3
X6-4
X6-11
X6-12
X6-1
X6-2
X6-9
X6-10
X5-5
X5-6
X5-9
X5-10
X5-3
X5-4
X5-7
X5-8
52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
240 VAC ,
Bell Alarm
240 VAC
5A
5A
X9-13
X9-14X9-12
3A
3A
Assembled in USA
10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A
0131-FW
11 – 1
11 Shunt Trip / Closing Coil / Undervoltage release
11.1 Overview
Mounting locations
(1) 1st shunt trip F1
(2) Signaling switch S22
(3) Closing coil CC
(4) 2nd shunt trip F2
or undervoltage release (instantaneous) F3
or undervoltage release (time-delayed) F4
(5) Signaling switch S23 or S43
(6) Cut-off switch S14 for shunt trip 5% duty cycle
(7) Cut-off switch S15 for closing coil CC 5% duty cycle
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6)
(7)
11 – 2
11.2 Installing shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
2
1
Retaining bracket
3
4Replace retaining bracket and screw down.
11 – 3
11.3 Installing optional signaling switches on shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices
Signals the the operating status of the shunt trip, closing coil, or undervoltage device to the BSS.
A Snap in place
B Disassembly
(1) See-saw
(2) Signaling switch
(3) Guide
(4) Groove
(5) Snap-fit
1Disengage the snap-fit
2Pull out the signaling switch
11.4 Setting delay times on undervoltage release
Instantaneous release
(5)
B
1
2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A
short-time delayed:
instantaneous:
J1
td q 80 milliseconds
td q 200 milliseconds
11 – 4
Time-delayed release
11.5 Field Installation of a cut-off switch for shunt trips and closing coils
td = (0.2 ... 1.6 sec.) + 1.6 sec.
td = 0.2 ... 1.6 sec.
3 x 0,5
S1
Delay time td:1/8“
S14 S15
pre-wired
0136-07_nu
F1 CC F2
S15 S14
b
aa
11 – 5
A Shunt trip with cut-off switch S14
B Closing coil with cut-off switch S15
C Combination of shunt trip and closing coil with combined cut-off switch S14/S15
B
A
C
11 – 6
11.6 Mechanical function test
11.7 Connecting wires
Circuit diagrams (page 8-4)
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
Shunt trip Closing coil
1 Charge the closing spring manually (page 6-4)
2 Close circuit breaker (page 6-7)
3
4
Circuit breaker opens Circuit breaker closes
5 Opening the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
Armature
0169-02_u
CC
Armature
0083_u
0083_u
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
Terminals
CC
F1
F2, F3
F4
: X6.7 / X6.8
: X6.13 / X6.14
: X5.11 / X5.12
: X5.11 ... X5.14
: X9.9 / X6.7
S10
11 – 7
11.8 Final tasks
- Install front panel (page 23-4)
- Attach secondary disconnect blocks (page 5-14)
- Connect wires to secondary disconnect block (page 5-13)
- Move the draw-out circuit breaker into the test position (page 6-2)
- Ensure control voltage is connected
11.9 Electrical function test
NOTE
Make sure that the closing coil with 5% operating time is only activated when the circuit breaker is ready for closing.
Otherwise the closing coil will be damaged.
Closing coil Undervoltage release
1 Charge the closing spring (page 6-4)
2
3
Actuate the closing coil
Electrical Closed Remote activation
Remove control power to test undervoltage release.
4
Circuit breaker closes
0169-05_u
CC
0083_u
11 – 9
11.10 Updating the options label
NOTE
After installing additional electrical components, mark with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
The voltage must also be noted in the box.
Closing coil VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
Closing coil
—24 WLRCS24
— 48 WLRCS48
110-127 110-125 WLRCS120
208-240 220-250 WLRCS240
Signaling switches Catalog No.
Signaling switch for 1st shunt trip WLSTC
Signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip or undervoltage release WLUVRC
1st Shunt Trip VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
Shunt trip F1
— 24 WLST24
— 48 WLST48
110-127 110-125 WLST120
208-240 220-250 WLST240
2nd Shunt Trip or UVR VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
Shunt trip F2
—24 WLST24
— 48 WLST48
110-127 110-125 WLST120
208-240 220-250 WLST240
Undervoltage release F3 (instantaneous)
—24 WLUV24
— 48 WLUV48
110-127 110-125 WLUV120
208-240 220-250 WLUV240
Undervoltage release F4 (time-delayed)
—48 WLUVD48
110-127 110-125 WLUVD120
208-240 220-250 WLUVD240
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA
Charging Motor
Remote Close Coil
X5-2 (+)
X5-1 (-)
X6-7 (+)
X6-8 (-)
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
1st Shunt Trip
UVR
2nd Shunt Trip
Remote Reset
X6-13 (-)
X6-14 (+)
X5-11 (-)
X5-12 (+)
X9-1 (-)
X9-2 (+)
X8-13 (-)
X8-14 (+)
Ready to Close Switch
X6-5
X6-6
240 VAC
4A
240 VAC
1st Shunt Trip Switch
X9-7
X9-8
240 VAC
240 VAC
UVR Switch
Open Fuse Switch
X9-10
X9-11
X9-5
X9-6
52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b
X6-3
X6-4
X6-11
X6-12
X6-1
X6-2
X6-9
X6-10
X5-5
X5-6
X5-9
X5-10
X5-3
X5-4
X5-7
X5-8
52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
240 VAC ,
Bell Alarm
240 VAC
5A
5A
X9-13
X9-14X9-12
3A
3A
Assembled in USA
10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A
0131-FW
12 – 1
12 Auxiliary and control switches
(1) Bell Alarm S24
(2) Cut off switch for remote reset solenoid S13 (page 10-5)
(3) Signaling switch blown fuse S26
(4) Signaling switch S22 for 1st shunt trip (page 11-3)
(5) Signaling switch for ready-to-close S20
(6) Signaling switch S23 for 2nd shunt trip or under-voltage release (page 11-3)
(7) Contact position-driven auxiliary switch S1
(8) Contact position-driven auxiliary switch S2
(9) Contact position-driven auxiliary switch S4
(10) Contact position-driven auxiliary switch S3
(1) (3) (5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(4)
(2)
12 – 2
12.1 Installing internal auxiliary switches S1 - S4
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
The connecting wires from the auxiliary switches must be connected to terminals X5 and X6 according to the wiring plan (page 8-2).
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
Contact position-driven auxiliary switches Catalog No.
S1 + S2
(2 "a" + 2 "b" contacts) WLAS2
S1 + S2 + S3 + S4
(4 "a" + 4 "b" contacts) WLAS4
S1
S2
S3 S4
12 – 3
12.2 Installing the ready-to-close switch S20
Snap-in mounting
The connecting wires from the ready-to-close signaling switch must be connected to terminal X6 according to the wiring plan (page 8-3).
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
Signaling switches Catalog No.
Ready-to-close signaling switch S20 WLRTCS
S20
12 – 4
12.3 Trip Signaling Switches
- Remove trip unit (page 9-49)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
12 – 5
12.3.1 Trip Signaling Switches S13, S24, and S26
(1) S26 assembled with snap-in pins
(2) S13 snap in assembly
(3) S25 / S45 assembled with self-tapping screws
(4) S24 assembled with snap-in pins
The connecting wires from the signaling switches must be connected to secondary disconnects X8 and X9 according to the
wiring plan (page 8-3) and (page 8-6).
NOTICE
Over-tightening the mounting screws may deform the signaling switch and could lead to an incorrect indication
of breaker status.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
Signaling switches Catalog No.
Bell Alarm S24 (1 form C contact) WLBA
0192-3
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4) PZ 1
hand tighten
12 – 6
12.4 Control switches - Connecting wires
(1) Cut-off switch S13 for remote reset
(2) Cut-off switch S14 for shunt trip F1 (page 11-4)
(3) Cut-off switch S15 for closing coil CC (page 11-4)
(4) Motor disconnecting switch S12 (page 13-3)
12.5 Communication switches
Signaling switches for BSS (page 9-55)
12.6 Connecting secondary wiring
Circuit diagrams (page 8-4)
12.7 Updating the options label
NOTE
After installing additional components, mark the following data with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3,0 x 0,6
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA
Charging Motor
Remote Close Coil
X5-2 (+)
X5-1 (-)
X6-7 (+)
X6-8 (-)
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
1st Shunt Trip
UVR
2nd Shunt Trip
Remote Reset
X6-13 (-)
X6-14 (+)
X5-11 (-)
X5-12 (+)
X9-1 (-)
X9-2 (+)
X8-13 (-)
X8-14 (+)
Ready to Close Switch
X6-5
X6-6
240 VAC
4A
240 VAC
1st Shunt Trip Switch
X9-7
X9-8
240 VAC
240 VAC
UVR Switch
Open Fuse Switch
X9-10
X9-11
X9-5
X9-6
52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b
X6-3
X6-4
X6-11
X6-12
X6-1
X6-2
X6-9
X6-10
X5-5
X5-6
X5-9
X5-10
X5-3
X5-4
X5-7
X5-8
52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
240 VAC ,
Bell Alarm
240 VAC
5A
5A
X9-13
X9-14X9-12
3A
3A
Assembled in USA
10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A
0131-FW
12 – 7
12.8 Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
The circuit breaker may be equipped with an external auxiliary switch assembly. These external auxiliary switches are known as
Mechanism Operated Contacts. In short, the assembly is also referred to as the MOC.
The MOC assembly is mounted within the circuit breaker compartment (cradle) and is connected to the main breaker-driveshaft
via a coupler, which is added to the circuit breaker during the MOC installation.
The circuit breaker, itself, may be optionally ordered with either no internal auxiliary switches, a set of four internal auxiliary
switches (2 a + 2 b contacts), or eight internal auxiliary switches (4 a + 4 b contacts).
With the addition of a MOC device, an additional eight auxiliary switches (4 a + 4 b contacts) may be added to a circuit breaker.
Note referencing ANSI C37.100:
“a” contact: A secondary contact that is open when the circuit breaker is open, and closed when the circuit breaker is closed
“b” contact: A secondary contact that is closed when the circuit breaker is open, and open when the circuit breaker is closed
Cradle
(1) MOC
(2) 4 signaling switches
(3) Driver for connected position
(4) Driver for test position
(5) Warning label
(1)
S50
S51
S52S53
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
Attention: Four contact
blocks must be installed
for proper operation
Attention: Four contact
blocks must be installed
for proper operation
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
12 – 8
12.8.1 MOC Versions
The MOC device may be ordered in two versions for drawout circuit breakers:
The auxiliary contacts, in the “Connect Only” version of the MOC, only change state when the circuit breaker is opened/closed while it
is in the “CONNECTED” position within the circuit breaker compartment. There are two distinct models of the “Connect Only” MOC, one
for circuit breaker frame size 2 (WLMOCC) and a second for circuit breaker frame size 3 (WLMOCC3).
The second version is known as the “Test and Connect” version. In the “Test and Connect” version, the auxiliary contacts change state
when the circuit breaker is opened/closed while it is in the “TEST” or “CONNECTED” positions within the circuit breaker compartment.
Like the “Connect Only” version, there are two distinct models of the “connect only” MOC, one for circuit breaker frame size 2 (WLMOC)
and a second for circuit breaker frame size 3 (WLMOC3).
12.8.2 MOC Installation Instructions
There are two MOC versions available: with and without a driver for the test position. The version with only one drive is generally used for
fixed-mounted circuit breakers.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove circuit breaker from cradle (page 23-3)
12.8.2.1 Installing the coupler
In order to interface the MOC assembly (mounted in the circuit breaker compartment), the circuit breaker must be outfitted with a
coupler (see Figure 1).
In order to install the coupler, the clear plastic plug in the sidewall of the circuit breaker (see Figure 2) must first be removed.
Facing the breaker, the plug is on right sidewall. This is easily accomplished by levering with a small screwdriver.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Figure 1
Figure 2
12 – 9
The coupler snaps onto the end of the steel mainshaft. The steel band should not be removed when installing the coupler. Also ensure
that the coupler is oriented properly when installed. Figure 3 illustrates the proper installed orientation of a shaft extension (circuit breaker
shown in the OPEN position), with the tampered flange facing the rear of the circuit breaker..
NOTE
The tapered flange of the coupler must point towards the rear side of the circuit breaker.
Figure 3
0421-1_nu
12 – 10
12.8.2.2 Installing the MOC Baseplate Assembly
The MOC baseplate assembly is secured to the circuit breaker compartment (cradle) by two tabs in the rear and two screws in the front.
With the screws inserted from the inside of the cubicle, and the nuts and lockwashers on the outside, the nuts must be torqued to
71 lbin (8 Nm).
1
2
3
4
12 – 11
12.8.2.3 Removing the Contact Blocks
The contact blocks must be removed in order to access the terminals for wiring. The contact blocks should be removed by applying a small
amount of outward pressure with a thin blade screwdriver, in the area shown in Figure 6.
NOTICE
MOC Reliability
May cause intermittent signaling.
All four contact blocks, whether wired or not, must be installed into the MOC assembly to ensure reliable operation.
NOTICE
Contact block damage.
May cause loss of signaling.
Do not over-extend the feet of the contact block when reinstalling into the MOC assembly.
Figure 6
12 – 12
12.8.2.4 Wiring the Contact Blocks
The contact blocks are designated (front of cradle to rear of cradle) S50, S51, S52, and S53. Each contact block contains one “a” and one
“b” contact, with the terminal designations as shown below. Each terminal accepts a maximum of one wire, 14 AWG (or smaller), and shall
be tightened to 7 lbin (0.8 Nm).
12.8.2.5 Installing the Contact Blocks
The contact blocks must be firmly seated, with the feet of the contact block latched into the MOC assembly housing. If there is damage to
the contact block assembly, a replacement contact block must be used. Replacement contact blocks may be purchased per catalog number
WLMOCSWK (includes four replacement contact block assemblies).
NOTICE
MOC Reliability
May cause intermittent signaling.
All four contact blocks, whether wired or not, must be installed into the MOC assembly to ensure reliable operation.
NOTICE
Contact block damage.
May cause loss of signaling.
Do not over-extend the feet of the contact block when reinstalling into the MOC assembly.
7 mm
1/4“
S50
S51
S52S53
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
a
3
4
b
1
2
Attention: Four contact
blocks must be installed
for proper operation
Attention: Four contact
blocks must be installed
for proper operation
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
0,8 Nm
7 lb-in
12 – 13
12.8.2.6 Contact Ratings
12.8.3 Order numbers
Voltage
Maximum Current
Continuous Making Breaking
120 VAC 10 A 30 A 3 A
240 VAC 10 A 30 A 3 A
24 VDC 5 A 1.1 A 1.1 A
48 VDC 5 A 1.1 A 1.1 A
125 VDC 5 A 1.1 A 1.1 A
250 VDC 5 A 0.55 A 0.55 A
MOC Catalog No.
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts, cradle-mounted, 4 NO + 4 NC,
Test and connected position, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS II WLMOC
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts, cradle-mounted, 4 NO + 4 NC,
Connected position only, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS II WLMOCC
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts, cradle-mounted, 4 NO + 4 NC,
Test and connected position, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS III WLMOC3
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts, cradle-mounted, 4 NO + 4 NC,
Connected position only, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS III WLMOCC3
12 – 14
12.8.4 Combination of MOC and
mechanical interlocking module
For the MOC to be combined and operated with the mutual mechanical interlocking module, a special clutch shaft must be used in place
of the normal one.
(1) Clutch shaft
(2) Lock-nut
12.8.5 Mounting of MOC and mechanical interlocking module on the cradle
Longer side turned upwards
12 Nm
105 lb-in
wrench size
13mm
(1)
(2)
MOC
Side wall
Mechanical interlocking module
8 Nm
71 lb-in
5
Size
13 – 1
13 Motor-operated mechanism
For charging the closing spring automatically.
It is switched on if the closing spring is discharged and control voltage is applied.
The motor-operated mechanism is automatically switched off after the closing spring has been fully charged.
13.1 Installing the motor operator
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
13 – 2
Mounting the motor on the operating shaft
Fixing the motor-operated mechanism & connecting wires
Operating shaft of the manual operating mechanism
1
3
2
3,0 x 0,6
X5
Terminals
X5.1 (-)
X5.2 (+)
1
2
6 Nm
Size
5
53 lb-in
3
13 – 3
13.2 Optional motor disconnect switch on the front panel
Option.
For switching off the motor-operated mechanism control voltage. Supplied pre-assembled with one wire to be soldered .
Installing motor disconnect switch
Connecting motor disconnect switch
- Disconnect the brown wire from the motor-operated mechanism from terminal X5.2.
- Connect wire X5-2 of the disconnect switch S12 to terminal X5.2.
- Solder the brown wire from the motor-operated mechanism to terminal 4 of the disconnect switch S12.
See-saw
S 12
1
2Solder point
13 – 4
Installing the selector knob
- Factory installed accessory only. Available as replacement kit
Circuit diagrams (page 8-6)
13.3 Updating the options label
NOTE
After installing additional components, mark the following data with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
Voltage Power consumption Catalog No.
Motor-operated mechanism
24 V DC / 30 V DC 110 W WLELCMTR24
48 V DC / 60 V DC 120 W WLELCMTR48
110-127 V AC / 110-125 V DC 150 W WLELCMTR120
208-240 V AC / 220-250 V DC 130 W WLELCMTR240
Motor-operated mechanism
with motor disconnect switch
24 V DC / 30 V DC 110 W WLELCMTR24S
48 V DC / 60 V DC 120 W WLELCMTR48S
110-127 V AC / 110-125 V DC 150 W WLELCMTR120S
208-240 V AC / 220-250 V DC 130 W WLELCMTR240S
4
3
2
1
Front Panel
3,0 x 0,6
hand tighten
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA
Charging Motor
Remote Close Coil
X5-2 (+)
X5-1 (-)
X6-7 (+)
X6-8 (-)
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
240
250
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
VAC
VDC
120
125
VAC
VDC
1st Shunt Trip
UVR
2nd Shunt Trip
Remote Reset
X6-13 (-)
X6-14 (+)
X5-11 (-)
X5-12 (+)
X9-1 (-)
X9-2 (+)
X8-13 (-)
X8-14 (+)
Ready to Close Switch
X6-5
X6-6
240 VAC
4A
240 VAC
1st Shunt Trip Switch
X9-7
X9-8
240 VAC
240 VAC
UVR Switch
Open Fuse Switch
X9-10
X9-11
X9-5
X9-6
52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b
X6-3
X6-4
X6-11
X6-12
X6-1
X6-2
X6-9
X6-10
X5-5
X5-6
X5-9
X5-10
X5-3
X5-4
X5-7
X5-8
52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
240 VAC ,
Bell Alarm
240 VAC
5A
5A
X9-13
X9-14X9-12
3A
3A
Assembled in USA
10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A
0131-FW
14 – 1
14 Indicators and operating elements
There are additional indicators and operating elements available for field installation.
14.1 Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons
This accessory kit allows the access to the OPEN and CLOSE buttons of the circuit breaker to be limited in any combination of the supplied
components.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
14 – 2
Supplied Components:
(1) 2x access blocks. Button is only accessible with a 1/8" pin (or smaller) (page 17-2)
(2) 2x sealing caps for sealing or attaching a padlock to block the button (page 15-22)
(3) Shield to prevent inadvertent operation
(4) Mounting plate
Catalog No.
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
Catalog No.
Locking set WLLKKT
OPEN
CLOSE
3
2
1
PZ 1
hand tighten
14 – 3
14.2 EMERGENCY OPEN button
This accessory kit allows the installation of an EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton above the OPEN button. When depressed, the
breaker is opened, and the breaker is held in a trip-free condition until the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton is released.
Catalog No.
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
NOTE
Install the EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton as shown (arrow on the right side).
Catalog No.
EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton WLEPEN
3
1
2
4
Mechanical OFF
PZ 1
14 – 4
14.3 Operations counter
The operations counter is incremented when the circuit breaker completes the charging cycle (manual or electrically operated).
The mechanical operations counter can be installed only if the circuit breaker is equipped with a motor-operated mechanism.
Knocking out the fields on the front panel
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
Mechanical operations counter WLNUMCNT
1
2
PZ 1
Front panel
knock out
Use a suitable base.
deburr
15 – 1
15 Locking devices
15.1 Key Locks
Padlocking provisions (page 15-16)
Key lock Manufacturer Application
1 Breaker-mounted
key lock
KIRK
SUPERIOR
To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be opened. If the circuit breaker is closed, the
locking device is blocked. The block is only effective when the key is removed. The key can only be
removed in "OPEN" position.
(page 15-2)
2
Cradle-mounted
key lock KIRK
SUPERIOR
This cradle-mounted key lock prevents the closing of any circuit breaker installed in the cell which this
lock is installed. Up to two independent Kirk or Superior key locks may be installed.
To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be open. If the circuit breaker is closed, the locking device
is blocked. The block is only effective if the key is withdrawn. The key can only be removed in the
"OPEN" position. (page 15-4)
3Racking handle
key lock
KIRK
SUPERIOR
Prevents drawing out of the racking handle. The circuit breaker is protected from being moved. The
block is only effective when the key is removed. (page 15-11)
4Bell Alarm and open
fuse lockout key lock
A lockable cover prevents resetting the Bell Alarm or open fuse lockout after the breaker trips.
(page 15-15)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
15 – 2
15.1.1 Breaker mounted key lock
When the key is removed, the circuit breaker is locked in the open position.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
- Remove trip unit (page 9-49)
Installing the locking mechanism
For key lock types: KIRK, Superior
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
NOTE
When removing the screws (1), ensure that the cylinder does not slip out of the lock. If this happens, the lock cannot be re-assembled.
1
(1) 2
15 – 4
15.1.2 Cradle mounted key lock
When a key is removed, all circuit breakers racked into this cradle will be locked in the open position.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
0636_nu
15 – 5
Components of the key locking device
1
2
3
4
5
6
789
10
11
12
13
14
17
15
16
FS II and FS III 3-pole
22
20
14, 17
18 21 19
24
1
FS III 4-pole
(1) Countersunk head screw M6 with belleville washer and nut
(2) M4 socket head cap screw (must not be used in FS II, fused)
(3) Pre-assembled skid with guide
(4) Lever
(5) Spacer
(6) Kirk key, supplied separately including fixing screws
(7) Bolt with washer size 5 mm and clip (for 4 mm inner diameter
groove; (for 4 mm groove; for FS II only)
(8) 3x M4 socket-head cap screws with lock waschers and nuts (for
FS III only)
(9) Extension (for FS III only)
(10) Bolt with washer size 5 mm and clip (for 4 mm inner diameter
groove; (for 4 mm groove; for FS II only)
(11) Ramp extension (for FS III only)
(12) 2x M4 flat-head screw (for FS III only)
(13) Small attachment angle
(14) 2x M4 socket-head cap screws
(15) Spacer (for FS II only)
(16) Plastic slider (slotted)
FS II / III: short slot
FS II fused: long slot
(17) 2x spring lock washers
(18) Mounting plate
(19) Pre-assembled lever mechanism
(20) Attachment angle low
(21) 2X Thread-forming screws M4x8 and washers
(22) Bolt (long) with washers size 5 and 6 mm and clip size 4mm
(23) Bolt (short) with washers size 5 and 6 mm and clip size 4mm
(24) 2X Clip for 4mm inner diameter groove
15 – 6
Installing the locks
The way in which the locking module unit is installed is the same whether the unit consists of one lock or two locks. Do not use the spacer
which may be provided with the key lock. The spacer (5) supplied with the mounting must be used in place of the spacers supplied with the
lock.
For FS II 4-pole and FS III 3-pole only:
NOTE
Attach the lever (4) to the KIRK / Superior locks (6) with the screws supplied with the lock.
Attach the KIRK / Superior locks (6) together with the spacer (5) to the lock mechanism using the supplied screws.
NOTE
Omit Step 2 for FS II fused circuit breakers
0709-1
1
2
15 – 7
Mounting the skid with guide to the base plate of the cradle
(1) Base plate of the cradle
Mounting the guide on the guide rail
A Frame size II
B Frame size III and Frame size II 4-pole
(1) Guide rail on left side
(2) Spacer for FS II must be mounted between angle and guide rail
(3) Attachment angle
(4) Guide for FS II
(5) Guide for ANSI FS II fused
Step 3: For FS II fused insert the bolt in to the hole for the long slot.
1
2
3
(1)
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
PZ 2
0711_nu
0713_nu
A
B
(1) (2)
(1)
1
2
3
1
2
3
(3)
(4)
(5)
3,2 Nm
12 Nm
PZ 2
28 lb-in
PZ 2
106 lb-in
15 – 8
Frame size III 4-pole
Step 1. Mounting the plate with lever mechanism to the base plate of the cradle
Step 2. Mounting the guide to the attachment angle
Step 3. Mounting the attachment angle to the guide rail
Step 4. To connect the lever with the short slot of guide use the long bolt
Step 5. To connect the lever with the skid, use the short bolt
1
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
12 Nm
106 lb-in
5
2
4
3
15 – 9
Drilling the hole in the cubicle door
(1) Lower edge of door cutout
(2) Center of front panel
(3) Mounting surface of cradle
(4) Hole for first key cylinder
(5) Hole for second key cylinder (only if planned)
Knocking out the fields on the front panel
1Knock out the fields on the front panel using a suitable base
2Deburr the edges
Then:
- Install front panel (page 23-4)
Function test
- Check that the locking mechanism on the locks can rotate freely when the keys are turned.
- Check that the spring turns the locking mechanism back to the starting position when it is unlocked.
- By repeatedly drawing out and re-inserting the left guide rail, check that the carriage is also actuated and can move freely.
(5) (4) (3)
(1)
(2)
1
2
15 – 10
Catalog Numbers
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting Manufacturer Catalog No.
Single lock
Kirk WLDLKRK
Superior WLDSUP
Double lock
Kirk WLDLDKRK
Superior WLDLDSUP
Provision-only for Cradle Lock Catalog No.
Single Lock Provision WLDLPR
Double Lock Provision WLDLDPR
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting FSII 4-pole Manufacturer Catalog No.
Single lock
Kirk WL4DLKRK2
Superior WL4DLSUP2
Double lock
Kirk WL4DLDKRK2
Superior WL4DLDSUP2
Provision-only for Cradle Lock FSII 4-pole Catalog No.
Lock Provision WL4DLPR2
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting FSIII 4-pole Manufacturer Catalog No.
Single lock
Kirk WL4DLKRK3
Superior WL4DLSUP3
Double lock
Kirk WL4DLDKRK3
Superior WL4DLDSUP3
Provision-only for Cradle Lock FSIII 4-pole Catalog No.
Lock Provision WL4DLPR3
15 – 11
15.1.3 Installing racking handle key lock
When the key is removed, the circuit breaker's racking handle cannot be drawn out, meaning that the circuit breaker cannot be moved into
another position.
The key lock for the WL Fuse Carriage racking handle cannot be replaced. If damaged, please consult Technical Support.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
15 – 12
Pre-assembling the locking module
Installing
0767
1
2
3
4
6
5
15 – 13
(1) Socket head cap screw M5 with washer and nut
78
Size
4
5 Nm
45 lb-in
15 – 15
15.1.4 Installing a Bell Alarm cover key lock
When the key is removed, the cover cannot be removed and the Bell Alarm cannot be reset.
(1) Cover with safety lock
(2) Trip unit
Locking
Key lock Manufacturer Catalog No.
Bell Alarm and open fuse lockout key lock WLTUSC55
Knock out
1
Push outwards, not inward.
3
2(1)
(2)
(1)
1
2
Withdraw key
15 – 16
15.2 Padlocking provisions
Key Locks (page 15-1)
Padlock locking device Application
1 Padlock locking bracket
for "OPEN"
The locking bracket for "OPEN" can be locked with up to 4 padlocks 1/4” diameter. The circuit breaker cannot
be closed.
2Shutter If the circuit breaker has been removed, the shutter can be locked with padlocks. (page 15-19)
3Guide rails
The guide rails can be locked with 2 padlocks so that they cannot be drawn out. The circuit breaker is either in
the connected position or has been removed. It is not possible to insert a circuit breaker into the cradle.
(page 15-20)
4Racking handle Up to 3 padlocks can be used to prevent the racking handle being drawn out. The circuit breaker is then locked
against being moved. (page 15-20)
5Spring charging lever The spring charging lever can be locked with a padlock. This prevents manual charging of the closing spring.
(page 15-20)
6CLOSE Actuation of the CLOSE button can be prevented by locking the sealing cap with up to 3 padlocks. CLOSING via
the "electrical CLOSE" button and remote closing remain possible. (page 15-22)
7OPEN button Actuation of the OPEN button can be prevented by locking the sealing cap with up to 3 padlocks. Remote closing
remains possible.
(1)
(6)
(7) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
15 – 17
15.2.1 Padlock locking the breaker OPEN
This padlock provision is a standard feature. When the control gate is raised (step 1), the padlock provision can be extended, and padlocks
installed. With padlocks installed, this circuit breaker cannot be closed. This provision will support up to four 1/4" diameter padlocks at one
time.
Locking with a padlock
Field installation
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
- Install the control gate if not already present.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
1
23
15 – 19
15.2.2 Padlock Locking device for shutter
The shutter can be locked with padlocks. The padlocking provision can be fitted with up to 6 locks with 3/8“ bracket diameter at once.
Locking the shutter
Field installation of shutter (page 18-2)
Opening the padlock locking device
To unlatch the padlock locking device, press the latching pins (left and right).
NOTICE
Damage to shutter.
Applying too many padlocks may damage the shutter mechanism.
The maximum total weight of the padlocks must not exceed 2.2 lbs (1 kg).
0620_nu
1
click
click
0621_nu
2
2
2
3
2
0621-2_nu
1
1
0620-2_nu
2
15 – 20
15.2.3 Padlock Locking device for guide rails
The cradle is equipped with this locking device as standard. Up to two padlocks can be applied on each side. This prevents a circuit breaker
from being inserted into an empty cradle.
15.2.4 Padlock Locking device for racking handle
Draw-out circuit breakers are equipped with this locking device as standard. Up to three padlocks can be applied to prevent the circuit
breaker from being racked into another position.
15.2.5 Padlock Locking device for spring charging lever
This locking device is an optional accessory for preventing manual charging of the circuit breaker closing spring mechanism. It does not pre-
vent charging via the motor-operated mechanism.
; 5/16“ / 8 mm
max. ; 8 mm
1
23
5/16“
1
2
max. ; 8 mm
5/16“
15 – 21
Field installation
- Open the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4).
Then:
- Install front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
Padlock Locking device Catalog No.
Locking device for spring charging lever WLHANDLC
2
Knock out
1
15 – 22
15.2.6 CLOSE/OPEN padlock kit
The manual closing and/or opening of this circuit breaker can be prevented, when this optional accessory is installed. The covers for the
CLOSE button and the OPEN button can be fitted with up to three padlocks. With padlocks applied, it is still possible to electrically open and
close this circuit breaker.
15 – 23
Field installation of sealing cover
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
See also Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons (page 14-1)
Then:
- Install front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
Padlock Locking device Catalog No.
CLOSE/OPEN Padlock Kit WLLKKT
OPEN
CLOSE
3
2
1
PZ 1
hand tighten
16 – 1
16 Sealing covers
(1) Sealing cover for CLOSE button
(2) Sealing cover for ETU (electronic trip unit)
(3) Sealing cover for OPEN button
Sealing cover for CLOSE/OPEN buttons
Field installation of sealing cover (page 15-23)
Sealing cover for ETU (electronic trip unit)
Sealing and locking device (page 9-53)
17 – 1
17 Mechanical interlocks
Mechanical interlock Application
1Access block via CLOSE/OPEN button
(locking set)
The CLOSE/OPEN buttons are each covered in such a way that operation is only possible
with a tool. (page 17-2)
2Cubicle door locking mechanism The cubicle door cannot be opened
- if the circuit breaker is in the CONNECTED position. (page 17-3)
3Interlock against racking when
cubicle door is open
The racking handle cannot be withdrawn if the cubicle door is open.
0064-06-04_nu
(3)
(1)
(2)
17 – 2
17.1 Field installation of CLOSE / OPEN buttons blocking device
This interlock limits access to the circuit breaker's manual CLOSE and/or OPEN buttons. The blocking device only allows access to the
manual CLOSE and/or OPEN buttons via a small tool (1/8" diameter rod).
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Remove front panel (page 23-4)
Then:
- Fit front panel (page 23-4)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
Mechanical interlock Order No.
Access block via CLOSE button (locking set) WLLKKT
OPEN
CLOSE
: 0.25“ (6,35 mm)
3
2
1
PZ 1
hand tighten
17 – 3
17.2 Cubicle door interlock
This interlock prevents the cubicle door being opened if the circuit breaker is in the CONNECT position.
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
17 – 4
17.2.1 Installing the interlock mechanism to the cradle
Then:
- Insert the draw-out circuit breaker into the cradle and push it into the disconnected position (page 6-1)
17.2.2 Cubicle door interlock drill pattern
(1) Centerline of breaker front panel
(2) Door cutout for breaker front panel
(3) Inner side of cubicle door
(4) Hole for manual defeat Ø 7/32 inches
(5) Hole for manual defeat Ø 7/32 inches
Drill this hole only if a manual defeat is required.
(6) Mounting surface
4
Engage tension spring
5
1Engage tension spring
2
press + hold
3
17 – 5
17.2.3 Installing catch on the cubicle door
(1) Clip with hole for manual defeat
(2) Inner side of cubicle door
(3) Catch
(4) 2 washers ISO7089 - 5
(5) 2 hex nuts M5
17.2.4 Function check
- Rack the circuit breaker into the connected position
- Close the cubicle door
Checking the manual defeat function:
(1) Lock position with circuit breaker closed
(2) Device in normal position
(3) Device in bypassed position
Interlock Order No.
Door locking mechanism for cradle WLDRLC
(1)
(2)
(3)
17 – 6
17.3 Interlock to prevent racking with cubicle door open
-Open and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove the circuit breaker from the cradle (page 23-3)
Installing the mechanical interlock
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
1Engage spring
3
2
Engage spring
4
check
5
Base plate of cradle
17 – 7
Function check
- Insert the circuit breaker into the cradle and push it into the disconnected position (page 6-1)
- It must not be possible to draw out the racking handle
17.4 Coding between circuit breaker and cradle
Draw-out circuit breakers and cradles are equiped with a factory coding.
This coding ensures that only circuit breakers can be inserted whose blade contacts match the contacts of the cradle and whose instanta-
neous interrupting capacity and rated current correspond to those of the cradle.
Mechanical interlock Order No.
Locking device against moving the circuit breaker if
the cubicle door is open WLDRLC5UL
18 – 1
18 Additional options for the cradle
18.1 Shutter
The shutter is closed when the draw-out circuit breaker is in disconnect position or outside the cradle.
The shutter can be fixed in a closed position and protected against unauthorized opening by means of padlocks. (page 15-19)
(1) Shutter
(2) Locking strap
(3) Locking device
(4) Actuator
(1) Actuator mounting holes for:
FS III M-class, FS III fuse carriage
(2) Actuator mounting holes for:
FS II, FS III except M-class and fuse carriage
(3) Four supports, only for the version listed under (2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2) (1) (2)
(3) (3)
18 – 2
18.1.1 Field installation
Pre-assembly
(1) 6 (8 for FS III)
(2) 4 (8 for FS III) washers
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
0730_nu
6x
2
1
(1)
(2)
3 Nm
T 30
28 lb-in
18 – 3
The following is the bill of material and tools required to install the shutter.
Bill of material
(1) Shutter subassembly (1 unit)
(2) Socket head cap screws M6x10 with locking coating (8 units)
(3) Shutter spring assemblies (4 units)
Tools required
(4) ¼ inch slotted-type screwdriver
(5) 5 mm hex socket screwdriver
(6) Torque wrench with 5 mm hex socket bit
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(4)
18 – 4
(1) Slider Assembly
1Inspect the shutter mechanism.
2Check for shipping damage.
3Check that screws are tight and that the shutter mechanism moves freely when opening.
(1) Danger label
1Position the shutter subassembly as shown.
2Notice that the danger label was placed on top.
3Carefully position shutter subassembly into cradle.
Do not apply excessive force to the sliding mechanism.
(1)
(1)
18 – 5
1Open the shutter mask.
2Slide the shutter subassembly to the end of the cradle; the stab tips are protruding.
This creates space for installing the shutter spring assemblies.
(1) White "trumpet"
(2) Rear tines
(3) Rear spring bearing
(4) Center guide pin head
(5) Locating dowel pins
(6) Font tines
(7) Front spring bearing
(8) Center guide pin tail
1Inspect the shutter spring assemblies to make sure that the two locating dowel pins (5) are present, that the front (7) and rear (3)
tabs are at a 90° angle, that the front tines (6) are straight and parallel and that the center guide pin is firmly in place at the front and
rear, as shown. If deficiencies are found, please contact SIEMENS Technical Support.
1
2
1
(6)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
18 – 6
(1) Front tines
(2) 2x locating dowel pins
Installing the four shutter spring assemblies.
1Place each spring assembly tine into cradle cut-outs, first by inserting rear tines.
2Twist the assembly towards the side wall of the cradle.
3Ensure that the locating dowel pins are seated, and front tines are inserted through the side wall.
Do not apply excessive force to the white trumpets when inserting the tines through the side walls; if necessary, adjust tines using pliers.
1Spread the tines with a turning motion using the slotted-type screwdriver (clockwise and counterclockwise). Check that the shutter
spring assembly is firmly in place. Attach all four shutter assemblies as described.
Ensure that the tines are spread.
2After installing and affixing the shutter spring assemblies, pull the shutter towards the front so that it is flush to the screw flanges of
the white trumpet.
3
(1) (2)
2
0626-1
1
18 – 7
1Using a hexagon socket screwdriver (or equivalent), screw the shutter spring assemblies and the shutter subassembly together.
When setting the screws in place, hold the shutter steady by its corners. Tighten the 8 screws with 31 lb-in ±10%.
(1) Torque wrench for tightening torque 31 lb-in ± 10%
1Use a torque wrench to ensure that the eight screws are tightened to a torque of 31 lb-in ± 10%.
2Carry out a visual check that the shutter assembly installation looks sqare and 4 trumpets are parallel to side walls. Inspect for any
crack or bending signs on the four corner of the shutter guides or shutter sliding windows. Inspect for and remove any loose parts,
e.g. springs, screws etc.
0626-2
3,5 Nm
Size
5
31 lb-in
2
(1)
1
18 – 8
1Carry out a final check to ensure that the shutter is functioning. Open the shutter.
Do not apply excessive force to sliding mechanism.
2To avoid damage to Locking mechanism feature
Fold back and latch the wings of the locking device to avoid damage of the shutter while inserting and in racking of the
circuit breaker.
18.1.2 Catalog numbers
Interrupting class Frame size Catalog No.
Shutter
N, S, H, L, F II WLGSHUT2
H, L, F III WLGSHUT3
M, fuse carriage III WLGSHUTM3
B
A
18 – 9
18.2 Truck Operated Contacts - TOC (Cradle Accessory)
The cradle can be retrofitted with truck-operated contacts (TOC). These optional accessories allow the customer to evaluate the position of
the circuit breaker in the cradle.
(1) TOC signaling switch module
Three versions are available (Order numbers (page 18-11).
WLGSGSW111 (Version 1):
- One form C contact for DISCONNECT position (S30)
- One form C contact for TEST position (S31)
- One form C contact for CONNECT position (S34)
WLGSGSW321 (Version 2):
- One form C contact for DISCONNECT position (S30)
- Two form C contacts for TEST position (S31 and S32)
- Three form C contacts for CONNECT position (S33, S34, and S35)
WLGSGSW6 (Version 3):
- Six form C contacts for CONNECT position (S30, S31, S32, S33, S34, and S35)
Terminals
The TOC accessory is equipped with an integrated terminal block. The integrated terminal block is of spring clamp design, and will accept
1xAWG 20 – 1xAWG 14 for each point
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
(1)
18 – 10
Circuit breaker postion and TOC contact state
C
ontact o
p
en
C
ontact closed
Switch
Designation
Terminal
Points Test position Connected positionDisconnect position
Circuit breaker position
S30
S31 / S32
S33 / S34 / S35
TOC Config.3
S30 / S31 / S32
S33 / S34 /S35
1
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
1
1
1
18 – 11
Installation
Depending on spatial conditions in the switchgear assembly, it may be necessary to wire the TOC prior to installation.
Then:
- Insert the circuit breaker into the cradle and rack it into the connected position (page 6-1)
Catalog numbers
TOC Version Catalog No.
1 CONNECT, 1 TEST, 1 DISCONNECT WLGSGSW111
3 CONNECT, 2 TEST, 1 DISCONNECT WLGSGSW321
6 CONNECT WLGSGSW6
2
4
3
1
8
7
19 – 1
19 Mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
Mechanical interlocking module
(1) Cradle
(2) Fixed-mounted breaker
19.1 Configurations
A maximum of three circuit breakers may be interlocked.
NOTE
For proper function of the interlocking device, the following minimum prerequisites have to be met:
1Bowden cables are to be laid out as straight and as unbowed as possible.
2Bending radii of the Bowden cables must exceed > 20" (500 mm).
3The total curvature of the Bowden cable must not exceed 540 degrees.
4When stacking interlocked circuit breakers vertically, the interlocking devices shall be vertically aligned with each other.
5Circuit breakers intended to be interlocked must be positioned so that Bowden cables of 6 ft or 15 ft (2 m or 4.5 m) length can
be laid out per the above requirements 1-4.
6Before adjusting the interlocking device, the Bowden cables must be secured, e.g. using cable ties.
7Adequate spacing is required to provide enough room for adjustment of the interlocking device.
(2)
(1)
19 – 2
19.1.1 General notes
(1) Output 1
(2) Holes with press nut for socket head cap screw M6 with washer for the configuration of the mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
(3) Non-interchangeable brackets
(4) Input 1
(5) Input 2
(6) Output 2
In the following configuration instructions, the following designations apply:
A 1 : Output signal 1
E 1: Input signal 1
S 1 : Circuit breaker 1
For example, in order to couple the output signal 1 of circuit breaker 1 with the input signal 2 of circuit breaker 2,
the abbreviation S1 A1 - S2 E2 is used.
The states of the circuit breaker are shown at the front panel:
Circuit breaker closed
Circuit breaker open and not ready to close
(interlocked)
Circuit breaker open and ready to close
(not interlocked)
S1S2S3
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
19 – 3
19.1.2 Mechanical interlocking two sources (open transition)
The two sources are interlocked to prevent paralleling (open transition).
Description:
A circuit breaker can be closed only if the other is open.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable.
Order no. (page 19-3)
Connections of Bowden cables:
Example Possible circuit breaker states
S 1S 2
1st Bowden cable: S1 A1- S2 E1
2nd Bowden cable: S2 A1- S1 E1
S1S2
19 – 4
19.1.3 Mechanical interlocking two sources with a tie circuit breaker (open transition)
The two sources are interlocked to prevent paralleling (open transition).
Description:
Any two circuit breakers can be closed, with the third being interlocked.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cables. Three additional Bowden cables must be ordered separately.
Order no. (page 19-4)
Connections of Bowden cables:
Example Possible circuit breaker states
S 1S 2S 3
1st Bowden cable: S1 A1- S2 E1
2nd Bowden cable: S1 A2- S3 E1
3rd Bowden cable: S2 A1- S1 E1
4th Bowden cable: S2 A2- S3 E2
5th Bowden cable: S3 A1- S1 E2
6th Bowden cable: S3 A2- S2 E2
S1
S2
S3
19 – 5
19.1.4 Mechanical interlocking feeder circuit breakers (single load, open transition)
The feeder breakers are interlocked so that only one feeder may be closed at a time.
Description:
When one circuit breaker is closed, the other two cannot be closed.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable. Three additional Bowden cables must be ordered separately.
Order no. (page 19-5)
Connections of Bowden cables:
Example Possible circuit breaker states
S 1S 2S 3
1st Bowden cable: S1 A1- S2 E1
2nd Bowden cable: S1 A2- S3 E1
3rd Bowden cable: S2 A1- S1 E1
4th Bowden cable: S2 A2- S3 E2
5th Bowden cable: S3 A1- S1 E2
6th Bowden cable: S3 A2- S2 E2
S1S2S3
19 – 6
19.1.5 Mechanical interlocking three sources (open transition to standby system)
The standby system is mechanically interlocked with the two source circuit breakers to prevent paralleling the standby system with either or
both primary source(s).
Description:
Two circuit breakers (S1, S3) can be independently opened and closed, the third (S2) being ready to close only if the other two are open. If
the third is closed, the other two cannot be closed.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable. A Bowden cable must be ordered separately.
Order no. (page 19-6)
Connections of Bowden cables:
Example Possible circuit breaker states
S 1S 2S 3
1st Bowden cable: S1 A1- S2 E1
2nd Bowden cable: S2 A1- S1 E1
3rd Bowden cable: S2 A2- S3 E1
4th Bowden cable: S3 A1- S2 E2
S1S2S3
19 – 7
19.1.6 Mechanical interlocking source and tie circuit breaker (open transition to standby system)
The standby system is mechanically interlocked with the tie circuit breaker to prevent paralleling with primary source.
Description:
One circuit breaker (S1) can be opened and closed independently of the two others. The two others cancel each other out, i.e. one can only
be closed if the other is open.
Materials required:
Two of the three circuit breakers (S2, S3) each have an interlocking module and a Bowden cable.
Order no. (page 19-7)
Connections of Bowden cables:
Example Possible circuit breaker states
S 1S 2S 3
1st Bowden cable: S2 A1- S3 E1
2nd Bowden cable: S3 A1- S2 E1
S1
S2
S3
19 – 8
19.2 Installing interlocking module
-
- Switch off and discharge the closing spring
(page 23-2)
- Remove the breaker from the cradle
(page 23-3)
or remove the fixed-mounted breaker if necessary (page 5-2)
- Remove front panel and side cover on the right, if required
(page 23-4)
19.2.1 Installing intermediate shaft and coupling
Fitting
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
Frame size Length L (mm)
I48
II 118
III 232
Mechanical interlooking module
with ring
1
19 – 9
For frame size III, draw out version:
NOTE
Working through step 9, the intermediate shaft must engage in a hole inside the circuit breaker.
Only then it will be possible - working through step 10 - to fit the support for the intermediate shaft in the guide of the side wall.
mechanical interlocking module
with ringg
23
4
5
Hold
6
7
8
9
19 – 11
19.2.2 Fitting interlocking module
Mechanical interlocking module
(1) Cradle
(2) Fixed-mounted breaker
(3) 2x socket head cap screw M6x12 with strain washer
(4) 1x socket head cap screw M6x25 with strain washer and square nut
(5) 2x socket head cap screw M6x35 with strain washer
(6) 2x jam nut; penetrates into mounting foot by tightening; if necessary, prevent jam nut from rotating
(7) 1x washer with large outside diameter
Then:
- Install back the breaker (page 5-2)
Note
If there isn't enough free space for installation on the right side of the circuit breaker inside the cubicle, it may be advantageous to
pre-assemble the Bowden cables on the output side before fitting the interlocking module. (page 19-12)
1
3
2
(2) (3)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(4)
Size
5
(1)
(3) (7)
8 Nm
19 – 12
19.2.3 Mounting the Bowden cables
Fitting Bowden cable on output site
Securing the Bowden cable
Installing the Bowden cable at the input of the circuit breaker to be interlocked
4
1
3 2
5
6
7
0256-2_u
R > 20”
(500 mm)
1
2
3
4
6
57
19 – 13
(1) Steel index clip
Adjusting the Bowden cable
Then:
- According to the planned configuration of the circuit breaker interlocking, screw socket head cap screws with toothed lock
washers, respectively plastite-screws with lock washers into the associated index clips if applicable Configurations (page 19-1)
- Insert the draw-out circuit breaker into the cradle, push into disconnected position, close the cubicle door if required and rack it
into connected position (page 6-1)
(1)
(1)
1
4
2
3
19 – 14
19.2.4 Function check
- Close the cubicle doors
- Charge closing spring of circuit breakers to be interlocked (page 6-4)
- Test the various possibilities of the planned interlocking configuration one after the other
- Re-adjust Bowden cables if necessary
Then:
- Discharge the closing spring of the circuit breakers to be interlocked (page 23-2)
Catalog Numbers
Note
The following maintenance points must be followed:
1The adjustment of the Bowden cables needs to be checked after the first 100 switching operations and must be readjusted if
necessary.
2The adjustment of the interlocking device needs to be checked and, if necessary, readjusted every 1000 operations or at least
once every year.
3During the inspection, the Bowden cables have to be checked against kinks and abrasions, split wires of the exposed
steel cable, damage to the cable housing and the adjustment unit (tube setting with thread and nut) and have to be readjusted
if necessary. In addition, the movability of movable parts of the interlocking device in their bearings needs to be examined.
4In extreme environmental conditions (e.g. increased environmental temperature or exposure to chemicals) maintenance checks
needs to be performed more frequently.
5When maintaining the circuit breaker, check the operation of the interlock device and replace as necessary. See table (page -14).
Mechanical Interlocking Catlog number
Mechanical interlock assembly WLNTLK
Qty.(1) Bowden Cable - 2m WLNTLWIRE2
Qty.(1) Bowden Cable - 4.5m WLNTLWIRE4
20 – 1
20 Arc chute covers
The arc chute cover is available as an optional accessory for cradles.
The cover is provided to protect the breaker from larger foreign objects (e.g. tools).
20.1 Field installation
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove the circuit breaker from the cradle (page 23-3)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
20 – 2
Frame size II
(1) Socket head cap screw M6x20
(2) Self-tapping screw M4 x10
(3) Socket head cap screw M6x20
Frame size III
For frame size III, installation is essentially the same, but the steps 6 to 9 can be omitted, since the related part is already installed.
1
21
2
Size
5
10
5
4
3
45
6
7
7
9
88
9
(1)
(2)
(3)
Size
5
8 Nm
71 lb-in
PH 2
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
20 – 3
20.2 Catalog numbers
*) Not available for FS II fused circuit breakers
**) Not available for FS III M-class
Frame size Catalog No.
Arc chute cover for cradle II *) WLGARC2
III **) WLGARC3
Arc chute cover for cradle (4-pole) II WL4GARC2
III WL4GARC3
21 – 1
21 Door sealing frame
Dimension drawing of door cutout
Front view of the cubicle door
(1) Mounting surface of the cradle
(2) Center of breaker front panel
(3) Eight mounting holes for the door sealing frame
21 – 2
Installing the door sealing frame
Not for use with fuse carriages.
Catalog No.
Door sealing frame WLDSF
1
2
3
NOTICE
22 – 1
l
22 Plexiglas breaker cover
Dimension drawing for door cutout and mounting holes
(1) Center of breaker front panel
(2) 4 mounting holes for hinges
(3) Mounting surface of circuit breaker or cradle
NOTE
Following a short circuit interruption, check that the Plexiglas breaker cover is firmly in place and the seal is maintained.
22 – 2
Attaching the Plexiglas cover
(1) Cubicle door with door cutout
(2) Plexiglas cover
(3) Hinge pin
(4) 2 hinges with opening function (right and left)
(5) 8 x Socket head cap screws M5 with washer and lock nuts
Installation of the right side hinge in the same fashion.
Handling:
To open the Plexiglas cover, push the hinge pins on the left or right hinge together or, to remove the Plexiglas cover, unlock both hinges.
Catalog number
Catalog No.
Plexiglas cover WLPGC
23 – 1
23 Maintenance
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this instruction manual and these product labels, a "qualified person" is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved and who,
in addition, has the following qualifications:
d) Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and label circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
e) Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
f) Is trained in administering first aid.
The WL circuit breaker is designed and constructed to the highest standard of quality, using the best materials available. Design tests and
experience have shown that the circuit breakers can withstand and perform greater than the minimum requirements of the associated
design and performance standards. Because of the variability possible due to ambient conditions, it is recommended that these circuit
breakers be placed on a regular inspection and maintenance cycle.
Contact assemblies need to be changed depending on their condition, but no later than
- 12,500 operations in FS II up to 1600 A; (3- and 4-pole)
- 10,000 operations in FS II 3200 A; (3- and 4-pole)
- 10,000 operations in FS III; (3- and 4-pole)
The switchgear operator must determine the inspection intervals depending on the conditions under which the circuit breaker is used:
- minimum 1 time per year
- after breaking heavy current
After 1000 switching operations, it is recommended to inspect:
- arc chutes and contact systems
- mechanical functionality
- main and auxiliary circuits, function and connecting quality
- plausibility control of trip unit settings and correction, if necessary
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment, after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings, safety
notices, and maintenance procedures contained herein and on the devices.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation and
maintenance.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
23 – 2
23.1 Preparation for maintenance
23.1.1 Opening the circuit breaker and discharging the closing spring
1
OPEN the circuit breaker
2
Disconnect secondary
circuits
3
CLOSE the circuit breaker
4
Depress the OPEN button
again
5
Indications
Position Indicator
red
green
Secondary Disconnects
23 – 3
23.1.2 Removing the circuit breaker from the cradle
Crank the circuit breaker into the disconnected position
- Unlock racking handle / withdraw racking handle (page 6-3)
Push in the racking handle
Pull circuit breaker into withdrawn position and remove
NOTICE
Racking Handle Damage.
Turning the racking handle beyond the stop will cause damage to the racking mechanism.
When the stop is reached, rotate the handle counter-clockwise until it can be stowed.
blue
Position indicator
red
green
Stop
2
34
1
2
3
1
23 – 4
23.2 Changing front panel
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
23.2.1 Removing front panel
23.2.2 Reinstalling the front panel
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
11
2
3
PH 2
2
1
33
PH 2
2,5 Nm
22 lb-in
23 – 5
23.3 Checking arc chutes
It is recommended that the arc chutes be inspected on a regular basis.The arc splitter plates erode as the result of load breaking. This
constitutes normal wear. The erosion of the arc splitter plates can manifest itself as wear of the plates, a layer of soot, or small spots of
collections of molten metal. In case of heavy wear (severe erosion, large deposits of molten metal, etc), the circuit breaker should be
replaced.
It is also necessary to replace the arc chutes when the circuit breaker's internal contacts are replaced. See Checking contact
erosion (page 23-10) for evaluation of contact wear, and Replacing the circuit breaker internal contact assemblies (page 23-11) for internal
contact replacement.
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
23 – 6
23.3.1 Removing arc chutes
1Loosen screw by approx. 15 mm; do not remove it;
FS III and FS II, class C:
remove screw completely
2Push the cover back;
FS III: lift the cover carefully
3Remove the cover
4Take out the arc chute
23.3.2 Visual inspection
In the case of heavy wear (burnout on arc splitter plates), replace the arc chutes.
WARNING
Damage to arc chute components.
Mishandling may lead to broken insulation plates of the arc chute housing, and compromised insulation capacity.
Do not stand arc chutes up, when placing them on a table, or any other surface outside of the circuit breaker. The arc chutes should be
placed on their side to prevent breakage of the insulation plates.
1
2
4
PH 2
0043-01
2
1
3
4
For Frame Size III:
5
For Frame Size II:
23 – 7
23.3.3 Installing arc chutes
12
6
5
PH 2
0043-02
3
4
5
6
For frame size III
3
PH 2
23 – 8
Frame size II and frame size III
1Insert arc chute, push cover back if necessary
2Slide the cover into place
3Check position of the 2 screens, FS III only
4Hook the cover carefully into place and fold it down, FS III only
5Insert the screw and tighten to the specified torque
23.3.4 Catalog numbers
Interrupting class Frame size Catalog No.
all II WLARC2
H, L, F III WLARC3
MIII WLARCM3
0043-02
1
2
3
4
5
PH 2
10 Nm
89 lb-in
23 – 9
23.4 Inspection of arc chute covers
The arc chute cover is available as an optional accessory for cradles.
In addition to the arc chute inspection, an inspection of the arc chute covers is also recommended. The powder-coated inner sides of the
covers which face the arc chutes must not be burned.
A layer of soot or small spots of collections of molten metal are normal.
If the powder-coating on the inner side of the cover has burned through or damaged, this must be replaced Arc chute covers (page 20-1)
in the opposite order
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
0695-01
23 – 10
23.5 Checking contact erosion
It is strongly recommended that the breaker's internal contacts be inspected on a regular basis. Load breaking and short-circuit trips cause
contact erosion. The WL circuit breaker is equipped with a contact erosion indicator for monitoring wear of the circuit breaker's internal
contacts.
-OPEN circuit breaker the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3)
- Manually charge the closing spring (page 6-4)
- Close the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
- Remove the arc chutes (page 23-6).
View with the circuit breaker closed
(1) Indicator pin
(2) Indicator pin is visible in the big recess
(3) Indicator pin is no longer visible
(4) Arcing tip
(5) Arc Chamber
If the indicator pin is no longer visible, the contact system must be replaced.
The contact system must also be replaced if:
- the end of the circuit breaker's mechanical service life according to its technical data has been reached (due to wear on the copper
braids).
- heavy wear of the arcing tip is visible
(triangular tips have lost approx. 5/16“ of their original length)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Will cause serious personal injury.
Do not place hands or objects within the arc chamber.
0071-1
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
23 – 11
23.6 Replacing the circuit breaker internal
contact assemblies
If the circuit breaker's internal contacts need to be replaced following an inspection, this can be done using the following procedure.
When replacing the circuit breaker's internal contacts, it is recommended that all three poles be replaced at the same time. It is also required
that the arc chutes be replaced when the breaker internal contacts be replaced at the same time. See Checking arc chutes (page 23-5) for
replacement arc chutes.
-OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
-Remove the circuit breaker from the cradle (page 23-3)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
NOTE
Pole assemblies are not field-replaceable for frame size III, M-class circuit breakers.
23 – 12
23.6.1 Removing front panel
23.6.2 Removing arc chutes
(page 23-6)
23.6.3 Removing vertical adapter
Removing lower contact supports in FS II (page 23-20).
23.6.4 Removing pole assemblies
Mounting actuating shaft retainer
NOTICE
Damage to the operator mechanism.
Failure to install the actuating shaft retainer will cause the closing spring to discharge and will result in the operator
mechanism being misaligned and damaged.
Follow steps 1 through 5 closely to ensure that the actuating shaft retainer is properly installed.
11
2
3
PH 2
0640-3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Size
5 mm
23 – 13
1Remove hole plug
2Press contacts together and hold them while completing steps 3, 4 and 5
34 5 Mount and fix main shaft retainer
Removing racking shaft
Strip off the driving collar of the spring dump mechanism when extracting the racking shaft (page 23-21).
1Remove retaining ring
2Remove crank
3Pull out racking shaft on the other side
2
1
3
4
5PH 2
Actuating shaft retainer
3
12
23 – 14
Removing current sensors
Lay circuit breaker on its side
1Remove cover of cable duct
2Detach connectors
3Remove current sensor covers
4Remove current sensors
Frame size II: unhook the circuit breaker feet
1Place circuit breaker in upright position, remove both circuit breaker feet, remove screw
2Only loosen these screws
2
1
4
3
Size
5 mm
12Loosen only
Size
4 mm
23 – 15
Frame size III: Remove circuit breaker feet
(1) Leave this area open
(2) Suitable support circuit breaker here
(3) Circuit breaker feet
1Remove screws
2Remove circuit breaker feet
Removing rear wall
3Remove upper screws
4Remove lower screws
5Support circuit breaker
6Rearwall carefully draw off to view the end position retaining springs
7Note the position of the end position retaining springs
8Separate and remove rearwall
9Remove end position retaining springs
Removing upper fixed contacts
1Remove three bolts and associated nuts
2Remove fixed contact
NOTE
Before removing the screws, support circuit breaker in such a way that the circuit breaker feet are not supporting the weight of the
circuit breaker.
1
2
(2) (2)
(1) (3)
(3)
3
4
Size
6 mm
Frame size III only:
Size
8 mm
23 – 16
6
7
8
9
5
2
1
Size
5 mm
23 – 17
Removing lower moving contacts
Clean and grease bearings and coupling bolts before assembly.
(Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52, Fa. Klüber Lubrication München KG)
23.6.5 Installing pole assemblies
Installing upper fixed contacts in rear wall
2Mount contact and insert square nut in recess
3Fix contacts
Re-tighten screws of guide horns with 89 lb-ft;
Installing lower moving contacts
Clean and grease bearings and coupling bolts before assembly.
(Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52, Fa. Klüber Lubrication München KG)
Installing lower moving contacts
1Mount supports for connecting bars
2Mount central pole assembly
3Insert coupling bolt
4Mount external pole assemblies
1
2
3
41Support connecting bars
1Push out coupling bolt
1Remove coupling bolt
1Remove pole assemblies
3
Size
5 mm
10 Nm
89 lb-ft
1
2
3
4
1
2
23 – 18
Installing rear wall
(First remove supports for pole assemblies)
5Screw tight of the bottom first, starting in the middle;
short screws on the bottom, long screws on the top.
Function test:
It must be possible to press the contacts completely together, and they must return independently to their original position. If this is not the
case, loosen the rear wall and check that the end position retaining springs are properly in place.
WARNING
Loss of overcurrent protection.
Pinching or crimping of the current sensor cable harness may result in loss of overcurrent protection.
Lay the cable harness carefully and do not pinch or crimp the wires.
WARNING
Reduction of current carrying capacity.
Incorrect assembly may result in a reduction of contact force, which may reduce the current carrying capabilities of the cir-
cuit breaker.
After re-assembling the circuit breaker housing, the contacts should be inspected to make sure that they are aligned and mobile.
This is accomplished by closing the circuit breaker, and observing the main contacts from above (looking down through the breaker's
arc chambers).
3
4
5
1
22
1 Insert end position retaining springs
2 Inspect to ensure that the coupling bolts are
centered
3Attach rear wall
4 Insert connecting bars through the rear wall
6
Frame Size II:
18 Nm
Size
6 mm
Upper
12 Nm
Size
6 mm
Lower
Frame Size III:
25 Nm
Upper
18 Nm
Lower
13 ft-lb 13 ft-lb
18 ft-lb
9 ft-lb
Size
8 mm
Size
6 mm
23 – 19
Attaching the circuit breaker feet
Installing current sensors
1Lay circuit breaker on its side, insert connecting wire
2Insert current sensors
3Reposition sensor covers
4and attach
NOTICE
Damage to circuit breaker housing.
Turning in self-tapping screws not in the existing threads will damage the breaker housing and prevent the sensor cover
from beeing secured.
Tighten the screw as follows:
- Insert the screw by hand with slight inward pressure
- Rotate the screw counter-clockwise by hand until the thread fits
- Tighten
- Tighten to a torque of 45 lb-in
7
8
9
Size
4 mm
10 Nm
89 lb-in
3445 lb-in
5 mm
5 Nm
Size
All upper screws
89 lb-in
5 mm
10 Nm
Size
All lower screws
1
2
23 – 20
For frame size II only:
Fit support for the lower contacts together with the sensor covers
(1) Frame size II, 3200 A
(2) Frame size II, 800 - 2000 A
5Establish plug connections
WARNING
Loss of overcurrent protection.
Incomplete connections of the sensor to the sensor wire harness may result in loss of overcurrent protection.
Make sure that the connectors are fully inserted and latched when connecting the sensor cable harness to the sensor.
0524-1
89 lb-in
5 mm
10 Nm
(1)
(2)
Size
All lower screws
45 lb-in
5 mm
5 Nm
Size
All upper screws
6
5
23 – 21
6Attach cable chanel cover
Removing the main shaft retainer
1Place circuit breaker in an upright position, press and hold the contacts together, through steps 2 and 3
2Unscrew the main shaft retainer
3Remove the main shaft retainer
4Remove the actuator
5Attach the cover
Installing the racking shaft
When inserting the racking shaft slide on the driving collar for the spring dump mechanism. Position both flanges of the driving collar in the
groove of the circuit breaker housing.
0520
to ETU
current
sensor L1 sensor L2 sensor L3
current current
23
4
PH 2
1
5
23 – 22
1Insert racking shaft
2Mount crank
3Secure crank
23.6.6 Adjusting the contact wear indicator
- Charge the closing spring manually (page 6-4)
-Close (page 6-7))
(1) Indicator pin
(2) Indicator pin before adjustment
(3) Indicator pin adjusted
Using a screwdriver, cut the plastic indicator pin along the upper edge of the large recess.
If the indicator pin is no longer visible, the contact system must be replaced.
32
1
0071-2
(1)
(2)
(3)
screwdriver
10 mm / 3/8‘‘ blade
23 – 23
23.6.7 Attaching the vertical adapter
*) For frame size II, 800 - 2000 A only
A Version A
B Version B
NOTICE
Damage to finger clusters.
Incorrect adjustment of the vertical connections on the circuit breaker may cause damage to the finger cluster assemblies
when the circuit breaker is racked into the cradle.
Adjust the vertical connections according to the dimension drawings on the following pages.
0640-4
1
3
2
4
70 Nm
50 ft-lb
B
0643-02
1
2
3
4
*)
Size
10 mm
70 Nm
50 ft-lb
A
23 – 24
Frame size II
(1) Spacer
(2) Hex-head screw
800 A, 1600 A: M12 x 45,
2000 A: M12 x 55,
3200 A: M12 x 80,
3200 A: 4-pole version, N-pole bottom M12 x 80
(3) Belleville washer
(4) Threaded plate
(5) Washer
(6) 800 A, 1600 A, 2000 A: M12 nut
3200 A: threaded plate
(7) Vertical adapter
(8) Finger cluster
(9) Carriage bolt M12 with belleville washer and nut
4-pole versions:
1600, 2000 A N-pole top and bottom: M12 x 60
3200 A, N-pole top: M12 x 75
A Construction Style A
B Construction Style B
NOTE
To achieve correct finger cluster position in frame size II, center the vertical adapter of the center pole (phase B) on the copper connector
of the frame and tighten it. Shift the vertical adapters (7) of the outer poles (phase A & B) outwards until the specified distance of 5 1/4" is
reached, and tighten them.
0640-5
(1)
(3)
(9)
(3)
(9)
(7)
(8) (3)
(9)
(3)
(9)
(7)
(8)
BB
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(8)
0644-01
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Only FS II (3200 A)
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A)
AA
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A) Only FS II (3200 A)
23 – 25
Frame size III
(1) Hex-head screw M12 x 80
(2) Belleville washer
(3) Washer
(4) M12 nut
(5) Vertical adapter
(6) Finger cluster
(1) Reinforced bend of the inner finger clusters can be adjusted as desired.
Reinforced bend of the inner finger clusters can be adjusted as desired.
NOTE
To achieve correct finger cluster position in frame size III, center the vertical adapter of all poles on the copper connector of the frame.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
23 – 26
23.6.8 Order numbers
(1) For the noted finger clusters, the finger cluster edge guard should be oriented away from the center pole(s) of the circuit breaker.
For interior poles (i.e. B-phase, and 4-pole A-phase), the orientation is insignificant.
Adjustment of reinforced bend of internal fingerclusters open
Breaker internal contact assembly:
(one required for each phase)
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current
In max (A)
Suitable for circuit breaker types Order No.
II
800 / 1600
WLN2A308, WLN2A316 RCS2N10
WLS2A308, WLS2A316 RCS2S10
WLH2A308, WLF2A308, WLH2A316,
WLF2A316, WLF2S308, WLF2S316 RCS2H10
WLL2A308, WLL2A316,
WLL2S308, WLL2S316 RCS2L10
2000
WLS2A320 RCS2S15
WLH2A320, WLF2A320, WLF2S320 RCS2HF15
WLL2A320, WLL2S320 RCS2L15
3200
WLS2A332 RCS2S30
WLH2A332 RCS2H30
WLL2A332, WLL2S332 RCS2L30
III 4000 / 5000
WLH3A340, WLF3A340, WLH3A350,
WLF3A350, WLF3S340, WLF3S350,
WLF3A332, WLF3S332
RCS3HF30
WLL3A340, WLL3A350,
WLL3S340, WLL3S350 RCS3L30
M-class: 3200 / 4000 / 5000 WLM3A332, WLM3A340, WLM3A350 RCS3M30
all all Grease used for assembly WLGREASE
23 – 27
23.6.9 Attaching the front panel
23.6.10 Installing the arc chutes
When the breaker internal contacts are replaced, it is also necessary to replace the arc chutes. See Installing arc chutes (page 23-7).
23.6.11 Mechanical function test
- Charge the closing spring manually (page 6-4)
-Close (page 6-7)
- Open (page 6-7)
- Check again the wear indicator (page 23-10)
2
1
33
PH 2
2,5 Nm
22 lb-in
23 – 28
23.7 Exchanging the primary disconnects
(1) Finger cluster
(2) Stab tip
23.7.1 Exchanging the finger cluster
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring (page 23-2)
- Remove the circuit breaker from the cradle (page 23-3)
(1) Self-tapping M4 screw
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
(2)
(1)
6
7
8
9
10
(1)
PZ 2
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
1
2
3
5
4
PZ 2
23 – 29
Lubricating the finger clusters
Clean and grease finger contacts on both ends (between stab tip and finger cluster, and between vertical adapter and finger cluster) before
assembly. (Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52 by Klüber Lubrication)
Attaching vertical adapter with finger cluster (page 23-23)
23.7.2 Catalog numbers
NOTE
Ensure, that the shoulder bolt has free play in the slotted holes of the brass bracket of the finger cluster.
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current
In max (A)
Catalog No.
Replacement Finger Cluster Kit
II
800 / 1600 WLFNGR10
2000 WLFNGR15
3200 WLFNGR30
III 4000 / 5000 WLFCK3
Grease used for assemlby all all WLGREASE
23 – 30
23.7.3 Exchanging the stab tip
(1) Stab tip
(2) Socket head cap screw M6
(3) Hex-head screw M12
(1) 6x Socket head cap screw M10x40 (40Nm /28ft-lb) and belleville washer
(2) Stab tip bridge
(3) Vertical bus connector
(1)
(2)
(3)
5
76
8
9
8 Nm
71 lb-in
70 Nm
50 ft-lb
4
12
3Size
5 mm
Size
10 mm
Size
8 mm
0649-4
(2)
(1)
(3)
FS III only:
0649-3
23 – 31
23.7.4 Catalog numbers
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current
In max (A)
Catalog No.
Stab tip line II
800 / 1600 WLGST10163LL
2000 WLGST15203LL
3200 WLGST30323LL
Stab tip load II
800 / 1600
(2 bolt hole pattern) WLGST10163LL
800 / 1600
(4 bolt hole pattern) WLGST10163LD
2000
(2 bolt hole pattern) WLGST15203LL
2000
(4 bolt hole pattern) WLGST15203LD
3200 WLGST30323LL
Stab tip load and line III 4000 / 5000 WLGST30503LL
Grease for contact fingers all all WLGREASE
23 – 32
23.8 Cleaning and greasing the circuit breaker
Finger cluster
(1) Greasing points
1Wipe away old grease and
2apply new grease
0645-01
(1) (1) (1)
23 – 33
Cradle
(1) Greasing points
(2) opposite side accordingly
1Clean the track of the rails and
2relubricate the designated points
Grease Catalog No.
Isoflex Topas NB52
manufactured by Klüber Lubrication
München KG
WLBGREASE
0645-02
(1)
(1,2)
(1)
(1)
24 – 1
24 Technical Data
WL Power Circuit Breaker
Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers
1) Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions)
M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only.
2) Short-time Withstand Current ICW at 635VAC is 85 kAIC RMS
3) max. 600 V AC
WL frame ratings – Frame size 2 800A 1600A
Rating Class N S H L F N S H L F
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 254VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
508VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
600VAC — — — — 200 — — — — 200
635VAC 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 800A 200 - 1600A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.) 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 85 320
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/159/112 227/159/112
WL frame ratings – Frame size 2 2000A 3200A
Rating Class S H L F S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kAIR RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
600VAC — — — 200 — — —
635VAC 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 2000A 200 - 3200A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.) 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 700 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/209/152 227/209/152
WL frame ratings – Frame size 2 800A 1600A
Rating Class N S H L F N S H L F
Interrupting current frame Ics (kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 254VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
508VAC 50 65 85 100 200 50 65 85 100 200
600VAC — — — — 200 — — — — 200
635VAC 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 50 65 65 85 — 50 65 65 85 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 50 65 65 85 —
50 65 65 85 —
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 800A 200 - 1600A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.1) 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.1) 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) 85 320
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) Consult factory Consult factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/159/112 227/159/112
WL frame ratings – Frame size 2 2000A 3200A
Rating Class S H L F S H L
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
(kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 65 85 100 200 65 85 100
600VAC — — — 200 — — —
635VAC 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 65 65 85 — 65 65 85
Applicable rating plug range 200 - 2000A 200 - 3200A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.1) 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.1) 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) 700 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) Consult factory Consult factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/209/152 227/209/152
24 – 2
WL Power Circuit Breaker
Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers
1) Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions)
M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only.
2) Short-time Withstand Current ICW at 635VAC is 85 kAIC RMS
3) max. 600 V AC
1
WL frame ratings Frame size 2 Frame size 3
800 - 2000A 3200 - 5000A
Rating Class F L F L
Breaking capacity with external relay (kA RMS) 254VAC 20 100 40 100
50/60 Hz, instantaneous trip 508VAC 20 100 40 100
635VAC 20 85 40 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 20 65 40 100
WL frame ratings – Frame size 3 3200A 4000A 5000A
Rating Class M F H L M F H L M F
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
(kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
600VAC — 200 — — — 200 — — — 200
635VAC 85 — 85 85 85 — 85 85 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 100 — 85 100 100 — 85 100 100 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 100 — 85 100 100 — 85 100 100 —
Applicable rating plug range 800 - 3200A 800 - 4000A 800 - 5000 A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34 24
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.1) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.1) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) 700 1100 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I
n
) Consult factory Consult factory Consult Factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Carriage/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 225/260/306 225/260/306 225/260/306
2
33
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
24 – 3
WL Circuit Breakers
Frame Size II Frame Size III
Frame Rating 800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000
Endurance
Mechanical
operating
(without maintenance)
cycles
12,500 12,500 10,000 10,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
Mechanical
operating
(with maintenance)
cycles
15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical
operating
(without maintenance)
cycles
7,500 7,500 4,000 4,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Electrical
operating
(with maintenance)
cycles
15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Switching frequency 1/h 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Minimum interval
between circuit breaker
trip and next closing of the
circuit breaker (when
used with the automatic
mechanical reset of the
reclosing lockout ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
Secondary disconnect
screw-
wire sizes (Cu)
max # of aux.
type
1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
connecting leads x cross
terminal
or or or or or or or
section (solid or stranded)
2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16
spring
clamp
terminal
2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
Ring
2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
terminal
1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10
system
2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16
TOC wire connection size
spring
(Cu) max # of aux.
clamp
connecting leads x cross
section (solid or stranded)
terminal
1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
Weight
Circuit Breaker kg/lb 72/159 72/159 75/165 95/209 118/260 118/260 118/260
MOC wire connection
Bare
size (Cu) max # of aux.
wire
connecting leads x cross
pressure
section (solid or stranded)
terminal
1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
Maintenance consists of replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions.)
M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only.
For use only with ring terminals supplied by Siemens (WL10RL).
Fused circuit breaker weights (kg/lb) Frame size II (fused)
Frame size III (fused)
cirucuit-breaker 103/227 same as table above
Fuse carriage –
102/225
1
1
1
2
3
3
2
2 2 2 2 2 2
Cradle
Cradle
24 – 4
WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
Manual-operating mechanism with Mechanical Closing
Closing/charging the closing spring
Maximum actuating force required on hand
lever 52 lbs
Number of hand lever strokes required 9
Motor-operating mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing
Charging the closing spring
Closing solenoid and Shunt Trip Coil voltage tolerance 24V DC 14 - 28V DC
48V DC 28 - 56V DC
120V AC /
125V DC
70 - 140V DC
104 - 127V AC
240V AC /
250V DC
140 - 280V DC
208 - 254V AC
180Y / 104V AC
220Y / 127V AC
Power consumption (5% duty cycle) 120 W for 50 ms
Minimum closing solenoid actuation signal
required (5% duty cycle) 50 ms
Motor-operating mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing
Motor for charging closing spring
Motor voltage tolerance at 120V AC, 240V AC 85 - 110%
Extended tolerance for battery operation at
24 V DC, 48 V DC, 125 V DC, 250 V DC 70 - 126%
Power consumption of the motor 110 W
Time required for charging the closing spring 10s
For motor and switch-on solenoid
short-circuit protection
Short-circuit protection
Standard slow-blow cartridge 24 - 60 V 6A
110 - 250 V 3A
Auxiliary Release
Undervoltage release (UVR) Operating values 85% (circuit breaker can be closed)
35 - 70% (circuit breaker opens)
AC Coil voltage tolerance at 120 V AC,
240 V AC 85 - 110%
DC Extended tolerance for battery operation
at 24 V DC, 48 V DC, 125 V DC, 250 V DC 85 - 126%
Rated control supply voltage AC 50/60 Hz V120, 240
DC V24, 48, 125, 250
Power consumption (inrush / contiuous) AC VA 200 / 5
DC W200 / 5
Opening time of the circuit breaker for AC / DC ms 200
UVR (no delay time ), 2 settings
Setting 1 ms 80
Setting 2 ms 200
UVR (with delay time )
Adjustable delay s0.2 to 3.2
Reset by additional NC direct opening ms 100
24 – 5
WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
1) 250 V DC rating available since October 2005.
Auxiliary Contacts and Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
Contact rating Alternating current
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 240 V
Rated operational current, continuous 10A
Rated operational current, making 30A
Rated operational current, breaking 3A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 125 V, 250 V
Rated operational current, continuous 5A
Rated operational current, making 1.1A at 24 V, 1.1A at 125 V, 0.55 A at 250 V
Rated operational current, breaking 1.1A at 24 V, 1.1 A at 125 V, 0.55 A at 250 V
Bell Alarm Switch and Ready-to-Close Signal Contact
Contact rating Alternating current
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 240 V
Rated operational current, continuous 5A
Rated operational current, making 8A
Rated operational current, breaking 5A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 48 V, 125 V 250 V DC1)
Rated operational current, continuous 0.4 A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, making 0.4 A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, breaking 0.4 A 0.2 A
Shunt release, UVR and tripped signaling contacts
Contact rating Alternating current
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 127 V, 240 V
Rated operational current, continuous 3 A
Rated operational current, making 5 A
Rated operational current, breaking 3 A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 48 V, 125 V, 48 V DC 125 V DC (IEC
rating only)
Rated operational current, making 1.0 A 0.4 A
Rated operational current, breaking 1.0 A 0.4 A
24 – 6
WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
Truck Operated Contacts (TOC)
Contact rating Alternating current
50/60 Hz Rated operational voltage 120 V
Rated operational current, continuous 10 A
Rated operational current, making 6 A
Rated operational current, breaking 6 A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V 24 V, 48 V, 125 V 250 V
Rated operational current, continuous 6 A 1 A 1 A
Rated operational current, making 6 A 0.22 A 0.11 A
Rated operational current, breaking 6 A 0.22 A 0.11 A
24 – 7
WL Circuit Break er
F unction ov er vie w of the electronic tr ip units
Basic F unctions ETU745
Long-time ov ercurrent pro tection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF –
Se tting range
I
R =
I
n x … 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6,
0.65, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1
Switch-selectable ov erload p rot ection
(
I
2
t or
I
4
t dependent function)
Se tting range of time dela y clas s
t
R at
I
2
t
(seconds) 2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10,
14, 17, 21, 25, 30
Se tting range of
t
R at
I
4
t
(seconds) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Thermal memor (via slide switch)
Phase los s sensitivity at
t
sd=20ms (M)
N-conductor pro tection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF (via slide switch)
N-conduct or se tting range
I
N =
I
n x 0.5 … 1
Shor t-time dela y ed ov ercurrent pro t ection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF (via rotary switch)
Se tting range
I
sd =
I
n x … 1.25, 1.5, 2, 2.5,
3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
Se tting range of
t
sd
, fi xe d
(seconds) 0.02 (M), 0.1, 0.2,
0.3, 0.4, OFF
Switch-selectable shor t-time dela yed
shor t-cir cuit p rot ection
(
I
2
t
dependent function) (via rotary coding switch)
Se tting range of
t
sd at
I
2
t
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
Zone Selectiv e Int erlocking (ZSI) function per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous ov ercurrent pro tection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF,
Ext ended Instantaneous P rot ection
is enabled when OFF (via rotary coding switch)
Se tting range
I
i =
I
n x … 1.5, 2.2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
0.8 x
I
cw
= max, OFF =
I
cw
=EIP
Ground fault pro tection
O
(field installable module)
Tr ip and alarm function
De t ection of the ground fault curr ent
by r esidual summing me thod
De t ection of the ground fault curr ent
by dir ect summing me thod
Se tting range of the
I
g f or trip , B, C, D, E (100… 1200A)
Se tting range of the
I
g f or alarm A,
A,
B, C, D, E (100… 1200A)
Se tting range of the
t
g
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
Switch-selectable
ground fault p rot ection
(
I
2
t
/ fix ed)
Se tting range
t
g at
I
2
t
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
ZSI ground function per CubicleBUS module
available
– not available
O
optional
L
N
S
I
G
Ext ended Instantaneous P rot ection (EIP) allows the WL circuit-br eak er to be applied at the withstand
rating of the circuit breaker with minus 0% t olerance;
this means that there is no instantaneous over-
EIP further enables the cir cuit br eak er to be applied up to t he full instantaneous rating of
the circuit breaker on systems wher e the av ailable fault curr ent ex ceeds the withstand rating.
Gr ound F ault Module canno t be r em ov ed af t er installation.
1
2
I
n
2
1
time dela y
time dela y
time dela y
time dela y
time dela y
ride at all.
24 – 8
WL Circuit Breaker
Function overview of the electronic trip units
547UTEsnoitcnuF cisaB
Parameter sets
Selectable between
–B dna A tes retemarap
LCD
)enil-4( ciremunahpla ,DCL O
–cihparg ,DCL
Communication
detargetni SUBelcibuC
Communication capability via
SUBIFORP ro SUBDOM
Metering function
Metering function capability with
Metering Function or
SULP noitcnuF gnireteM
Display by LED
Trip unit active
Alarm
ETU error
L trip
S trip
I trip
pirt N
pirt G (only with ground fault module)
mrala G (only with ground fault module)
Tripped by extended protection or
noitcnuf yaler evitcetorp
noitacinummoC
Signal contacts with external CubicleBUS modules
(opto or relay)
gnin
raw tnerrucrevO
NO/FFO gniddehs daoL
)sm002( pirt emit -gnol fo langis ylraE
mrala erutarepmeT
ecnalabnu esahP
pirt suoenatnatsnI
pirt emit-trohS
pirt emit-gnoL
pirt rotcudnoc lartueN
pirt noitcetorp tluaf dnuorG (only with ground fault module)
mrala tluaf dnuorG (only with ground fault module)
yaler yrailixuA
rorre UTE
available
– not available
O optional
24 – 9
WL Circuit Break er
F unction ov er vie w of the electronic tr ip units
Basic functions ETU748 ETU776
Long-time ov ercurrent pro tection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF – –
Se tting range
I
R =
I
n x … 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 40-100% of In (Adjustable in Amps )
0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, 1
Switch-selectable ov erload p rot ection
(
I
2
t or
I
4
t dependent function)
Se tting range of delay time clas s
t
R at
I
2
t
(seconds) 2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 2 … 30 (step: 0.1s)
14, 17, 21, 25, 30
Se tting range of delay time
t
R at
I
4
t
(seconds) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1 … 5 (step: 0.1s)
Thermal memor y
(via slide switch)
(on/off via key pad
or communications)
Phase los s sensitivity at
t
sd
=20ms (M) (on/off via key pad
or communications)
N-conductor pro tection –
F unction can be switched ON/OFF (via slide switch) (via key pad or communications)
N-conduct or se tting range
I
N =
I
n x … 0.5 … 2, OFF
Shor t-time dela y ed ov ercurrent pro t ection
F unction can be switched ON/OF F
–
(via key pad or communications)
Se tting range
I
sd =
I
n x … 1.25, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 1.25 … 0.8 x Icw = max
3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 (step: 10A)
Se tting range of delay time
t
sd
,f ix ed
(seconds) M, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 M, 0.08 … 0.4, OFF (step: 0.001s)
Switch-selectable sho rt -t ime dela y
shor t-cir cuit p rot ection
(
I
2
t
dependent function) (via rot ar y coding switch) (via key pad or communications)
Se tting range of time dela y
t
sd at
I
2
t
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1 … 0.4 (step: 0.001s)
Zone Selectiv e Int erlocking (ZSI) function per CubicleBUS module per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous ov ercurrent pro tection
F unction can be switched ON/OFF ,
Ext ended Instantaneous P rot ection
is enabled when OFF – (via key pad or communications)
Se tting range
I
i =
I
n x … –
I
i =
I
cw = EIP 1.5 x
I
n…0.8 x
I
cs = max, OFF=
I
cw=EIP
Ground-fault pro tection O (field installable module) O(field installable module)
Tr ip and alarm function (via key pad or communications)
De t ection of the ground fault curr ent
by r esidual summing me thod
De t ection of the ground fault curr ent
by dir ect summing me thod
Se tting range of the
I
g f or trip A, B, C, D, E A … E (step: 1A)
Se tting range of the
I
g f or alarm A, B, C, D, E A … E (step: 1A)
Se tting range of the delay time
t
g
(seconds) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1 … 0.5 (step: 0.001s)
Switch-selectable
ground fault p rot ection
(
I
2
t
/ fix ed)
Se tting range delay time
t
g at
I
2
t
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1 … 0.5 (step: 0.001s)
ZSI ground function per CubicleBUS module per CubicleBUS module
available
– not available
O optional
L
N
S
I
G
Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL circuit breaker to be applied at the withstand rating of
the circuit breaker with minus 0% tolerance; this means there is no instantaneous override at all. EIP further
enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the full instantaneous rating of the circuit breaker in systems
where the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating.
Ground Fault Module cannot be removed after installation.
2
Note: ETU776 settings via WLBDA, Modbus, or Profibus: 1A steps
Via ETU Keypad: Below 1000A: 10A steps 1000A-1600A: 50A steps
1600A-10000A: 100A steps Above 10000A, 1000A steps
1
3
Notes:
M = Motor protection setting indicates phase loss sensitivity is enabled. LT pick-up reduced 80% when phase unbalance > 50%. ST = 20 ms
Communications = Setting the parameters of the trip unit via the Breaker Data Adapter, MODBUS, or PROFIBUS
Key pad = Direct input the trip unit
I
n
3
22
1
ed
-
on
24 – 10
available
– not available
O optional
WL Circuit Breaker
Function overview of the electronic trip units
677UTE847UTEsnoitcnuF cisaB
Parameter sets
Selectable between
parameter set A and B –
LCD
LCD, alphanumeric (4-line) O–
–cihparg ,DCL
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated
Communication capability via
MODBUS or PROFIBUS
Metering function
Metering function capability with
Metering Function or
Metering Function PLUS
Display by LED
Trip unit active
Alarm
ETU error
L trip
S trip
-pirt I
N trip
G trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
G alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Tripped by extended protection or
protective relay function
Communication
Signal contacts with external CubicleBUS modules
(opto or relay)
Overcurrent warning
Load shedding OFF/ON
Early signal of long time trip (200ms)
Temperature alarm
Phase unbalance
Instantaneous trip
Short-time trip
Long-time trip
Neutral conductor trip
Ground fault protection trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Ground fault alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Auxiliary relay
ETU error
Protective Relaying Pick-up Accuracy
Phase Unbalance (I) 2% (5…50% In)
Phase Unbalance (V) 2% (5…50% Vn)
THD (I) +/- 3% (80…120% Vn)
THD (V) +/- 3% (80…120% Vn)
Overvoltage +/- 2% (80…120% Vn)
Undervoltage +/- 2% (80…120% Vn)
Under/Over Frequency +/- 0.1 Hz
Metering and Protective Relaying Accuracies
Metering Values Accuracy
(I) at 1 x In+/- 1%
(V) at 1 x Vn+/- 0.5%
(P) at 1x In+/- 3%
(S) at 1 x In+/- 2%
(Q) at 1 x In+/- 3%
-
25 – 1
25 Abbreviations
ASet current for ground fault protection
A 1/2 Output signal 1/2 (mechanical interlocking module)
AC Alternating current
AMP AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AWG American Wire Gauge
BSet current for ground-fault protection
BDA Breaker Data Adapter
BSS Breaker Status Sensor
CSet current for ground-fault protection
CC Closing coil
COM15 Communication interface
COMM. Communication
CONNECT Connected position
CUB - c-
CUB + c+
DSet current for ground-fault protection
DC Direct current
DIN German Engineering Standard
DISCON Disconnected position
ESet current for ground-fault protection
E 1/2 Input signal 1/2 (mechanical interlocking)
ED Duty cycle
ESD Electrostatic-sensitive device
EN European Standard
ETU Trip unit (electronic trip unit)
EXTEND. Extended (additional) protection function
F1 1st shunt trip
F2 2nd shunt trip
F3 Undervoltage release
F4 Undervoltage release with delay time
F5 Tripping solenoid
F7 Remote reset solenoid
G-alarm Ground-fault alarm
G-tripping Ground-fault tripping
I / O Input / Output module
I2tDelay time-current relationship based on formula I2t=constant
I2tgDelay time for ground-fault based on formula I2tg = constant
I2tsd Delay time for S tripping based on formula I2tsd = constant
25 – 2
I4tDelay time-current relationship based on formula I4t = constant
I-tripping Instantaneous tripping (short-circuit)
Iab Operating value for load shedding
Ian Operating value for load restore
Ics Rated operational short-circuit breaking capacity
Icu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
Icw Rated short-time withstand current
ID Identification number
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IgCurrent setting value for G-tripping
IiCurrent setting value for I-tripping
IIT Single-pole short-circuit test current (IT systems)
INCurrent setting value for N-tripping
InRated current (value of rating plug)
In max Max. possible rated current
IRCurrent setting value for L-tripping
Isd Current setting value for S-tripping
L1 Phase 1
L2 Phase 2
L3 Phase 3
L-tripping Long-time delayed tripping (overload)
LED Light emitting diode
MMotor
MOC Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Conntacts
NNeutral pole
NC Normally closed contact
NO Normally open contact
N-tripping Neutral (overload) tripping
PIDG Ring lug style (Trademark of AMP)
PZ 3...6 Crimping tool (Weidmüller GmbH)
S 1/2/3 Circuit breaker 1/2/3 (mechanical interlocking module)
S1 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S10 Switch Electrical Closed
S11 Motor cut-off switch
S12 Motor disconnect switch
S13 Cut-off switch for remote reset
S14 Cut-off switch for shunt trip F1 (fast operation)
S15 Cut-off switch for closing coil CC (fast operation)
S2 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S20 Signaling switch for "ready-to-close"
S21 Signaling switch for "closing spring charged"
S22 Signaling switch for 1st shunt trip
25 – 3
S23 Signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip
S24 Bell Alarm signaling switch
S3 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S30 Signaling switch for disconnected position (TOC)
S31 Signaling switch for test position (TOC)
S32 Signaling switch for test position (TOC)
S33 Signaling switch for connected position (TOC)
S34 Signaling switch for connected position (TOC)
S35 Signaling switch for connected position (TOC)
S4 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S40 csignaling switch for "ready-to-close"
S41 c signaling switch for "closing spring charged"
S43 c signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip
S44 c signaling switch for "main contacts OPEN / CLOSED"
S45 c tripped signaling switch
S46 c signaling switch for connected position
S47 c signaling switch for test position
S48 c signaling switch for disconnected position
S50 ... S53 MOC (external auxiliary switches)
S7 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S8 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S-tripping Short-time delayed tripping
SIGUT Siemens trademark for aux. termination technique
ST Shunt trip
T.U. ERROR Trip unit error
TEST Test position
tgDelay time for G-tripping
TOC Truck operated cell switch (S30 … S35)
tRDelay time for L-tripping (defined at 6 x IR)
TRIP G Trip cause was ground fault
TRIP I Trip cause was short-circuit (instantaneous)
TRIP L Trip cause was overload
TRIP N Trip cause was neutral pole overload
TRIP S Trip cause was short-circuit (short-time delayed)
tsd Delay time for S-tripping
txDelay time for load monitoring
UcRated control voltage
UeRated operational voltage
UiRated insulation voltage
UImp Rated impulse withstand voltage
UVR Undervoltage release (instantaneous)
UVR td Undervoltage release (delayed)
25 – 4
VT Voltage transformer
WAGO WAGO Kontakttechnik, München
XTerminal designation according to DIN
ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking
Iavg Present average of current
Iavglt Long term average of current
ITHD Distortion factor of current
UTHD Distortion factor of voltage
26 – 1
26 Glossary
Automatic reset
Circuit breakers feature an automatic reset of the tripping solenoid. No manual resetting of the Trip Unit is required to
place the circuit breaker in a ready-to-close state. UL 1066 circuit breakers are factory-fitted with this automatic reset feature as standard.
The automatic reset feature can be removed as a customer option.
Auxiliary releases
Both undervoltage releases and shunt trips are available.
BSS module
Breaker Status Sensor - for collecting circuit breaker status information via signaling switches and transmitting these data to the
c.
Closing coil
A coil used for electrically closing the circuit breaker.
Closing spring
Module containing a spring as an energy store. The spring is charged by means of a hand-operated lever or a motor, and is latched in its
charged state. When the latches are released, the stored energy is transmitted to the pole and the circuit breaker closes.
Coding of auxiliary connectors
The auxiliary connectors are coded to prevent accidental interchanging of the auxiliary wiring connections.
COM15/COM16 Module
Communications module
Interface adapter for:
- converting c signals to PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS signals and vice-versa
- providing three potential-free outputs for control functions (OPEN, CLOSE, 1 freely available)
- one input, freely usable for control information from the switchgear.
Additional function for draw-out circuit breakers:
- detecting the circuit breaker position in the cradle by means of signaling switches S 46, S 47 and S 48.
c
Bus system in the vicinity of the circuit breaker and to the FieldBus (PROFIBUS-DP / MODBUS)
Electrical closing lockout
For electrical interlocking of two or more circuit breakers (closing interlock). The electrical closing lockout can block the circuit breaker from
closing via a sustained signal.
Electrical Closed
Electrical activation of the stored energy through the closing coil.
Guide rail
Used for placing the circuit breaker in the cradle.
Finger clusters
Connect the main terminals of the circuit breaker with the main terminals of the cradle.
Mechanical reclosing lockout and Bell Alarm
After tripping, the circuit breaker cannot be reclosed until the mechanical reclosing lockout has been reset by hand.
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts (MOC)
A switching module for signaling the circuit breakers switch position, which is mounted in the cradle and activated by the actuating shaft of
the circuit breaker.
26 – 2
Motor-operated mechanism
The geared motor charges the closing spring automatically as soon as voltage is applied to the auxiliary connections. After closing,
the closing spring is automatically charged for the next closing operation.
Position indicator
To show the circuit breaker position in the cradle.
Rated current coding
The rated current is coded at the factory, i.e. each and every circuit breaker can only be inserted into a cradle if they have the same rated
current.
Rating plug
This module defines e.g. the setting range of the overload protection.
Remote reset
The electrical signal of the tripped signaling switch and the red reset button are reset by the optional remote reset solenoid.
Lock OPEN
This additional function prevents closing the circuit breaker and fulfils the disconnecting condition in OFF position as per IEC 60947-2:
- "Mechanical Off" button pressed
- main contacts OPEN
- crank handle of draw-out circuit breakers removed
- the various interlocking conditions are fulfilled.
Shunt trip
For remote circuit breaker tripping and locking against closing.
Shutter
Shutters are insulation plates for covering live main circuits in the cradle (shock protection).
Signaling switch for circuit breaker position (TOC)
These auxiliary switches operate according to the circuit breaker position in the cradle (-> Truck-operated contact).
Spring charging lever
The closing spring is charged by several pumping operations.
Energy transformer
Power supply for the trip unit.
Tool operation
A cover with a hole (Ø 0,25") means that buttons can only be pressed using a rod.
TOC - Truck operated Cell Switch
For remote signaling of the circuit breaker position in the cradle.
Truck-operated contact (TOC)
A circuit breaker truck-operated auxiliary switch which is mounted in the compartment of a removable circuit breaker and is operated by the
circuit breaker frame (-> Signaling switch for breaker position).
Undervoltage release
For remote tripping and interlocking of the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker application in EMERGENCY OPEN circuits together with an
EMERGENCY OPEN facility to be arranged separately. The circuit breaker shall not be tripped by short-time voltage drops (e.g. motor start-
up).
Undervoltage release (time delayed)
For remote tripping and interlocking of the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall not be tripped by voltage drops (e.g. system transfers).
27 – 1
A
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Access block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Auxiliary and control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
B
Basic protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
C
Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Closing Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Coding between circuit breaker and guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
COM15 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
COM16 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Connected position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Contact erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Crank the circuit breaker into disconnected position . . . . . . . . 23-3
Cubicle door interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
D
Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Disconnected position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Door sealing frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
E
Electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
EMERGENCY OPEN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
F
Frame sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
G
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Ground-fault protection modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
I
Indicators and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Inserting racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inserting the circuit breaker in the guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
L
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Lock OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Locking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Locking set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Maintenance position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Make-break operations counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Manual reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Mechanism-operated contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
MOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Motor disconnect switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Mutual mechanical interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
O
Opening the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Options for guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-1
P
Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Padlocking facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16
Positions of the circuit breaker in the guide frame . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Q
Qualified Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
R
Racking circuit breaker into connected position . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Rating plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Re-closing a circuit breaker tripped by an trip unit . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Removing from service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Removing the circuit breaker from the guide frame . . . . . . . . .23-3
Replacing pole assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-11
Replacing the trip unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Resetting the Bell Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Ring terminal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
S
Safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1
Screwless terminal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Sealing caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
Sealing covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
Secondary disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Secondary disconnect terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-1
Standard specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Storage spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
T
Test position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Trip unit ETU745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Trip unit ETU748 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Trip unit ETU776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
U
Undervoltage release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1, 11-3
W
Wiring in guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Z
ZSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82
27 Index
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Norcross, GA 30092
Technical assistance:
1-800-241-3138
www.usa.siemens.com/powerdistribution
Version No.: CBIM-02000-0814
